gnus-user-agent
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
60dd7e0e 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-09-27
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e
DL
29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 31
1fa28578
GM
32\f
33* Changes in Emacs 21.1
34
4c724b32
DL
35** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
36`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
37
059cd2e1 38+++
6a0b0752
MB
39** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
40to be visited as images.
41
b856f39c 42+++
068127d6
GM
43** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
44operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
45
fd06c7da
MB
46** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
47(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
48remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
49may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
50
62c273d7
DL
51** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
52is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
53
54+++
55** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
56mode `iswitchb-mode'.
57
f393cf90
DL
58** Gnus changes.
59
60The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
61four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
62internationalization and mail-fetching.
63
64*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
65many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
66
67If you used procmail like in
68
69(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
70(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
71(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
72(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
73
327652be 74this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
75
76(setq mail-sources
77 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
78 :suffix ".in")))
79
80More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
81Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
82
83*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
84Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
85
60dd7e0e
DL
86*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
87parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables.
88Separate MIME packages like SEMI will not work. There are built-in
89facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is now just a
90compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
91
92*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
93called to position point.
94
95*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
96summary buffers and NOV files.
97
98*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
99of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
100
101*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
102subtly different manner.
103
104*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
105and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
106ever-changing layouts.
107
108*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
109
110*** There is image support.
111
112** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1138859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
114more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
115empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
116window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
117on.
118
ba9eeda1
GM
119** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
120set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
121file that is already visited under a different name.
122
42ac0ae5
GM
123** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
124nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
125
126** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
127recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
128signaled.
129
ba9eeda1 130** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
131support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
132use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
133buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
134M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
135new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
136
b941a14b 137+++
ba9eeda1 138** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 139and displays information about that.
b941a14b 140
ba9eeda1 141** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
142file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
143
d7b38c05 144** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 145added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
146Postscript files are included.
147
148** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
149`dired-ref.tex'.
150
25ad1371
GM
151** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
152expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
153
154This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
155determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
156mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
157interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
158regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
159associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
160
b856f39c 161+++
f0298744
DL
162** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
163displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
164menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
165menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
166
9a8d84ca
DL
167** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
168a version-dependent component.
169
d76c03ea
GM
170** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
171Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
172will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
173character is still bound as before.
174
3b4fa1b2
DL
175** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
176using that menu.
177
40e857ea 178** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 179suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 180
beb2eb00 181+++
c08398de
DL
182** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
183buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
184contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
185by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
186insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
187the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
188Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
189
db7a3ede 190+++
3d6cd763
GM
191** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
192coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
193escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
194such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
195recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 196always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 197read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
198(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
199RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 200
0b8a3a6d
DL
201** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
202environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
203
424d8b44 204+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
205** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
206point in a pop-up window.
207
6d35b49f 208+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
209** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
210displays all characters in that character set.
211
212** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
213coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
214
a4067978 215+++
5cb6a58e 216** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
217on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
218defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 219
424d8b44 220+++
a1b8d58b
GM
221** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
222
6e417ca5
DL
223** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
224been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
225
424d8b44 226+++
5898e075
DL
227** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
228`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
229indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
230indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
231
424d8b44 232+++
abfcc168
GM
233** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
234sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 235(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
236You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
237
424d8b44 238+++
cc181e95
GM
239** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
240on the display using several methods
241
424d8b44 242+++
cc181e95
GM
243- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
244a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
245be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
246
424d8b44 247+++
cc181e95
GM
248- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
249equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
250
da4496b6 251- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
252
253- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
254the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
255
424d8b44 256+++
3b4fa1b2 257** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 258an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 259command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 260does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 261
424d8b44 262+++
176256a1 263** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
264`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
265typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 266
dd0add8e
DL
267** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
268characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
269
bf3ba9ac 270+++
699238d9
GM
271** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
272compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
273this behavior.
274
275The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
276compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
277Emacs dump core.
278
424d8b44 279+++
699238d9 280** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 281
7233c5bd
GM
282*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
283whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
284is useful for debugging X problems.
285
286Example:
287
699238d9 288 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 289
100b3cbb
GM
290*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
291visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
292the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
293and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
294visual class names are
295
296 TrueColor
297 PseudoColor
298 DirectColor
299 StaticColor
300 GrayScale
301 StaticGray
302
303Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
304`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
305meaning.
306
307The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
308supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
309`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
310visual.
311
312Example:
313
699238d9 314 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
315
316*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
317specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
318default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
319resource values are `true' or `on'.
320
321Example:
322
699238d9 323 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 324
0d0c76b8
EZ
325** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
326more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
327now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
328
42088c12 329** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 330display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
331shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
332be customized.
c60ea02e 333
424d8b44 334+++
31047e0d
DL
335** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
336
424d8b44 337+++
b02786f9
GM
338** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
339all frames except the selected one.
340
3261c1d8
DL
341** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
342to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
343
ffe36136 344** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
345the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
346MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
347displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
348
0292b49f 349+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
350** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
351MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 352
559cee90
DL
353** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
354read mail from the menu etc.
355
480b5773 356+++
271b4185
GM
357** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
358a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
359
0daee095
GM
360** Changes in Texinfo mode.
361
362** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
363macros
364
365 Key binding Macro
366 -------------------------
367 C-c C-c C-s @strong
368 C-c C-c C-e @emph
369 C-c C-c u @url
370 C-c C-c q @quotation
371 C-c C-c m @email
372
559cee90
DL
373** Changes in Outline mode.
374
375There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
376`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
377the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
378
327652be 379** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 380
c0a8c108
EZ
381+++
382*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
383with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
384are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
385Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
386buffers to kill, as before.
387
388Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 389i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
390this way.
391
956777b3
GM
392** Changes to Show Paren mode.
393
394*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
395The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
396use. Default is 1000.
397
f6989277 398+++
404fa7d6
DL
399** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
400groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
401
424d8b44
DL
402+++
403** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
404M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
405M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
406buffers.
8964fec7 407
424d8b44 408+++
39783d73
WP
409** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
410under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
411.emacs file.
412
413The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
414determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
415
d35fce81
GM
416** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
417abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
418`directory-abbrev-alist'.
419
a933dad1
DL
420** Faces and frame parameters.
421
422There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
423Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
424`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
425`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
426sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
427for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
428parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
429
430Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
431`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 432`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
433`default' face and vice versa.
434
d80061fa 435+++
f77a4a8a
GM
436** New face `menu'.
437
438The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
439Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
440attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
441
424d8b44 442+++
a933dad1
DL
443** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
444
445The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
446colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
447correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
448the screen gamma of a frame's display.
449
450PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
451in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
452color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
453
454The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
455`ScreenGamma'.
456
457** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
458
459The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
460Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
461oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
462of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
463the text.
464
465** Emacs has a new face implementation.
466
467The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
468font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
469height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
470These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
471specify a font.
472
473Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
474These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
475under Lisp changes, below.
476
477** New default font is Courier 12pt.
478
424d8b44
DL
479+++
480** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
481of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
482otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
483
484** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
485truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
486foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
487customizing face `fringe'.
488
489** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
490can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
491
492** LessTif support.
493
424d8b44
DL
494Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
495You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
496
497** Toolkit scroll bars.
498
499Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
500LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
501configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
502bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
503bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
504Emacs.
505
506When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
507Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
508Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
509Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
510define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
511`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
512
513Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
514a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
515directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
516different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
517system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
518add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
519
520The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
521`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
522This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
523image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
524Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
525
526** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
527
528When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
529widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
530Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
531
424d8b44 532+++
a933dad1
DL
533** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
534
535When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
536whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
537defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
538highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
539displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
540whitespace.
541
6e612d4d 542+++
a933dad1
DL
543** Busy-cursor.
544
545Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
546display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
547
424d8b44 548+++
a933dad1
DL
549** Blinking cursor
550
551M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
552terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
553and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
554the group `cursor'.
555
556** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
557
558This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
559generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
560See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
561details.
562
563Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
564have to do anything to activate it.
565
566** Tabs and variable-width text.
567
568Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
569defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
570independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
571Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
572
573** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
574
424d8b44 575+++
a933dad1
DL
576*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
577
578 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
579
79dd1637
RS
580The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
581LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 582
79dd1637
RS
583*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
584LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 585
34d90e29 586+++
a933dad1
DL
587** Hscrolling in C code.
588
cc181e95
GM
589Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
590`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
591customized.
a933dad1
DL
592
593** Tool bar support.
594
595Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
596how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
d1e68bce
DL
597Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is displayed.
598To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
599for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 600
424d8b44 601+++
a933dad1
DL
602** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
603
604Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
605mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
606line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
607about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
608in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
609
610Currently, the following actions have been defined:
611
612- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
613buffers.
614
615- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
616M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
617
618- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
619
424d8b44
DL
620- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
621`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
622
623- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
624
625** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
626
627When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 628from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
629non-nil.
630
631** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
632
633Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
634Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
635the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
636italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
637Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
638attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
639on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
640
641** Sound support
642
2f516940 643Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 644driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 645supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 646
424d8b44 647+++
a933dad1
DL
648** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
649the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
650forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
651value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
652users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
653even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
654
655The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
656
0e18b431 657+++
a933dad1
DL
658** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
659
660As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
661drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
662`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
663
fdd8bb68 664+++
a933dad1
DL
665** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
666bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
667
668This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
669`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
670variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
671
c5d00c64 672+++
a933dad1
DL
673** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
674
675When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
676value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
677number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 678fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
679
680When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
681value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
682number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 683fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
684
685** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
686notably at the end of lines.
687
688All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
689spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
690
424d8b44 691+++
eee54b0e
DL
692There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
693
a933dad1
DL
694** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
695query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
696after each match to get the replacement text.
697
00782214 698+++
d5483ab1
GM
699** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
700you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 701
424d8b44 702** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
703you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
704lisp-complete-symbol.
705
7af69644 706+++
a933dad1
DL
707** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
708
163ea954
RS
709If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
710longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
711it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
712window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
713
714- User option: max-mini-window-height
715
716Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
717fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
718specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
719
720Default is 0.25.
721
2f72fd2f
GM
722** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
723
0d43b60d
GM
724** Changes to hideshow.el
725
726Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
727selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
728conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
729
730*** Generalized block selection and traversal
731
732A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
733(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
734which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
735`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
736point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
737(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
738
739If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
740i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
741backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
742the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
743
744*** Isearch support for updating mode line
745
746During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
747blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
748line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
749portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
750is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
751
752To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
753something like this in your .emacs.
754
755 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
756 (lambda ()
757 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
758
327652be
TTN
759*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
760
761Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
762header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
763`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
764moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
765block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
766behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
767useful.
768
769You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
770function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
771of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
772code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
773appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
774
775(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
776 (hs-hide-level 1)
777 (forward-sexp 1))
778(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
779
780The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
781emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
782only for code blocks.
783
784*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
785
786Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
787parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
788display for implementation.
789
790*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
791
792The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
793LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
794which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
795new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
796
797 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
798 hs-show-block C-c C-s
799 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
800 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
801 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
802 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
803 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
804
805These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
806
559cee90
DL
807** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
808
424d8b44 809+++
1b24b888
GM
810*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
811an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
812log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
813
424d8b44 814+++
1b24b888
GM
815**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
816current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
817
818+++
1b24b888
GM
819*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
820in a log file.
eb2aac9d 821
502004be 822+++
1b24b888
GM
823*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
824entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 825
502004be 826+++
1b24b888 827*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
828version number is performed based on regular expressions from
829`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
830Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 831
1b24b888
GM
832*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock
833highlighting.
834
3476b54a
GM
835** Changes in Font Lock
836
837*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
838font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
839mode.
840
b3b98592
GM
841** Comint (subshell) changes
842
66b6c480 843By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
f8d54c98 844distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
66b6c480
MB
845the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
846attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
847Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
848boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
849To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
850`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
851
b3b98592
GM
852Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
853and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
854
855The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
856buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
857buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
858
859The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
860M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
861the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
862
8c1bec7c
MB
863Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
864now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
865previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
866user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 867
e26cec67
GM
868** Changes to Rmail mode
869
c0510d27
GM
870*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
871set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
872receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
873recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
874`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
875as correspondent.
876
877Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
878mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 879regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 880
3b55acc9
GM
881*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
882to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
883Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
884with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
885for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
886
6a1950ec
GM
887*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
888like `j'.
889
5bb6f079
RS
890*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
891specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 892digest message.
e26cec67 893
993d8b7d
DL
894*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
895in which folder to put messages automatically.
896
400a1ed0
GM
897** Changes to TeX mode
898
899The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
900`latex-mode'.
901
a933dad1
DL
902** Changes to RefTeX mode
903
904*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
905 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
906 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
907 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
908 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
909 can be edited from that buffer.
910
911*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
912 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
913 `A' to use all marked entries).
914
915*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
916 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
917
918*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
919 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
920 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
921 been cited.
922
38de9631
GM
923** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
924The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
925semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
926in column 1 are always made leaves.
927
a933dad1
DL
928** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
929has the following new features:
930
931*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
932may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
933to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
934time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
935
936*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
937feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
938file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
939compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
940pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
941defaults to 1.
942
5d94f558 943** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
944file names.
945
424d8b44 946+++
a933dad1
DL
947** Tooltips.
948
949Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
950mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
951can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
952
953Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
954variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
955the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
956tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
957
424d8b44 958+++
a933dad1
DL
959** Customize changes
960
961*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
962`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
963cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
964
965*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
966Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
967default).
968
0ae51efb
GM
969*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
970between custom options. Example:
971
972 (defcustom default-input-method nil
973 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
974 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
975 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
976 :group 'mule
977 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
978 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
979
980This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
981current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
982first in a custom-set-variables statement.
983
a933dad1
DL
984** New features in evaluation commands
985
5e03eb84 986*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
987modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
988print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
989customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
990eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
991
5e03eb84
GM
992*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
993code when called with a prefix argument.
994
ead53494
GM
995** Ispell changes
996
37d8a691 997+++
bbe15990
EZ
998*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
999transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1000spell-checks the current buffer.
1001
37d8a691 1002+++
385ff9e3
GM
1003*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1004added.
1005
1006*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1007correction is made and re-checked.
1008
74ec6045 1009*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1010
1011*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1012cases.
1013
1014*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1015on syntax errors.
1016
1017*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1018end of the buffer.
1019
a933dad1
DL
1020** Dired changes
1021
1022*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1023command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1024is, delete only empty directories.
1025
1026*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1027command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1028copy directories recursively.
1029
f6737cde
GM
1030*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1031in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1032the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1033
2f72fd2f
GM
1034*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1035replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1036directory.
1037
7381ae05
MB
1038*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1039a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1040This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1041will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1042accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1043
e024b101
GM
1044*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1045from ls switches.
1046
a933dad1
DL
1047** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1048use the -f option when sending mail.
1049
b1c609b1
GM
1050** CC mode changes.
1051
1052Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1053current user setups (although it's believed that these
1054incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1055However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1056back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1057compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1058release.
1059
7972fcfc
GM
1060*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1061This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1062of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1063non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1064want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1065have to bother.
1066
1067Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1068situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1069and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1070If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1071the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1072by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1073
b1c609b1
GM
1074*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1075When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1076variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1077take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1078is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1079settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1080possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1081Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1082
1083By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1084special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1085the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1086of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1087above.
1088
1089Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1090when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1091function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1092call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1093then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1094values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1095only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1096function documentation for more info.
1097
1098The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1099especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1100with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1101intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1102such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1103is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1104configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1105global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1106
1107(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1108
1109**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1110This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1111
1112This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1113variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1114completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1115the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1116empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1117style system.
1118
1119**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1120In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1121c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1122as far as possible.
1123
1124*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1125CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1126surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1127chapter about this in the manual.
1128
1129**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1130The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1131recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1132primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1133adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1134
1135**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1136This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1137c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1138
1139**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1140This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1141
1142It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1143Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1144A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1145inside CC Mode.
1146
1147Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1148causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1149the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1150available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1151cc-mode/).
1152
1153**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1154The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1155specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1156literals.
1157
1158**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1159It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1160prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1161you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1162this function.
1163
1164*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1165It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1166to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1167struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1168Thanks to Eric Eide.
1169
1170*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1171It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1172opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1173
1174**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1175
1176*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1177See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1178better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1179and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1180
1181*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1182previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1183the column specified by comment-column.
1184
1185*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1186In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1187is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1188prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1189contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1190don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1191
1192*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1193instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1194arguments.
1195
1196*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1197
1198*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1199c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1200c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1201variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1202Provan).
1203
1204*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1205
c407c570
GM
1206** Makefile mode changes
1207
1208*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1209
5d94f558 1210*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1211Fontlock mode is active.
1212
87be76f6
GM
1213** Isearch changes
1214
3353ef5a
GM
1215*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1216so that searches can be resumed.
1217
1218*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1219respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1220that started the search.
1221
87be76f6 1222*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1223selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1224
c8a8458a 1225+++
87be76f6
GM
1226*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1227
d35fce81 1228Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1229`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1230search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1231before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1232highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1233`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1234
1235The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1236will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1237Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1238using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1239usual snappy response.
1240
1241If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1242matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1243set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1244isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1245
21bc6203 1246+++
35384f06
GM
1247** Changes in sort.el
1248
1249The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1250as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1251new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1252numeric base.
87be76f6 1253
d7b511c4
GM
1254** Changes to Ange-ftp
1255
424d8b44 1256+++
d7b511c4 1257*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1258names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1259sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1260
d7b511c4
GM
1261*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1262ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1263
9d453139
SS
1264*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1265output ^M at the end of lines.
1266
4b9347b3
GM
1267** Shell script mode changes.
1268
1269Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1270derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1271sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1272
79214ddf
FP
1273** Etags changes.
1274
1275*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1276
aca0be23 1277*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1278possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1279{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1280This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1281a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1282
79214ddf
FP
1283*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1284declarations when given the --declarations option.
1285
1286*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1287"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1288
1289*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1290types.
1291
de370c4c 1292*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1293
1294*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1295
1296*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1297are now tagged.
1298
1299*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1300variables are tagged.
1301
1302*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1303
8dc78b52
FP
1304*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1305for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1306
c8d94f86 1307+++
f6737cde
GM
1308** Changes in etags.el
1309
3f6e4b8b
GM
1310*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1311tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1312is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1313
f6737cde
GM
1314*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1315the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1316
1317If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1318FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1319TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1320obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1321
1322TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1323
1324FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1325List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1326
1327A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1328
1329 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1330 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1331 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1332
1333*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1334of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1335
1336*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1337names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1338
424d8b44 1339+++
fbc164de
PE
1340** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1341and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1342LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1343
c3eb1f10 1344+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1345** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1346Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
13478859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1348GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
13498859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1350releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1351(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1352
424d8b44 1353+++
163ea954 1354** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1355remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1356appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1357
1358** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1359
424d8b44 1360+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1361** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1362
6ab8d72d 1363+++
f6499c03 1364** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1365containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1366expression from that list, are not checked.
1367
5d94f558
SS
1368** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1369When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1370and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1371the buffer, just like for the local files.
1372
dc28878c
GM
1373** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1374
df8a9f78 1375+++
95931eb1
GM
1376** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1377displays local abbrevs, only.
1378
54baed30
GM
1379** VC Changes
1380
1381VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1382easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1383Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1384to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1385changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1386`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1387version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1388each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1389file is registered in that backend.
1390
1391When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1392backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1393directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1394master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1395the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1396As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1397
1398The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1399still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1400RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1401vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1402where it doesn't make sense.)
1403
1404The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1405obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1406`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1407
1408*** General Changes
1409
1410The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1411checks are always done now.
1412
327652be 1413VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1414operations.
1415
1416*** Changes for CVS
1417
1418There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1419default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1420remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1421by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1422regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1423that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1424queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1425
1426If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1427repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1428If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1429commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1430current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1431entire directory tree.
1432
1433The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1434"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1435is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1436"watched" by other developers.)
1437
1438*** Lisp Changes in VC
1439
1440VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1441add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1442library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1443then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1444a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1445provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1446of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1447you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1448`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1449
a933dad1
DL
1450** New modes and packages
1451
ff332647 1452+++
90cbf47e
GM
1453*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1454intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1455typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1456on certain projects.
1457
894ca69e 1458+++
90cbf47e 1459*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1460regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1461
d96d6bb0 1462 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1463
1464will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1465face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1466typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1467Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1468appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1469current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1470corresponding file is read.
1471
424d8b44 1472+++
d96d6bb0 1473*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1474Emacs is idle.
1475
31fc5d15
GM
1476*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1477parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1478
5cb6a58e
SM
1479*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1480package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1481be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1482
424d8b44 1483+++
578979ee
GM
1484*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1485facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1486separate Texinfo file.
1487
424d8b44
DL
1488+++
1489*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1490by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1491provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1492`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1493enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1494
424d8b44 1495+++
6abca616
EZ
1496*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1497without invoking external programs.
1498
1499The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1500and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1501`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1502is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1503Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1504
1505The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1506page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1507
719e2c6e 1508+++
5e5dff44
GM
1509*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1510authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1511
1512The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1513the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1514the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1515Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1516even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1517single step.
1518
1519On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1520matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1521probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1522contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1523
424d8b44 1524+++
f7136ee8
GM
1525*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1526unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1527actually modifying content of a buffer.
1528
bbd9b566
GM
1529*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1530PostScript.
1531
1532Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1533
1534The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1535
1536 ; comment (until end of line)
1537 A non-terminal
1538 "C" terminal
1539 ?C? special
1540 $A default non-terminal
1541 $"C" default terminal
1542 $?C? default special
1543 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1544 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1545 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1546 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1547 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1548 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1549 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1550 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1551 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1552 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1553 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1554 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1555 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1556 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1557 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1558
1559Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1560
99453a38
GM
1561*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1562align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1563determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1564example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1565equal signs of assignments.
1566
424d8b44 1567+++
559cee90
DL
1568*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1569paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1570
424d8b44 1571+++
6448a6b3
GM
1572*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1573list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1574buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1575customize the package.
1576
6344985d
GM
1577*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1578
249652b1
GM
1579*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1580replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1581is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1582and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1583not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1584which answers different needs.
1585
424d8b44 1586+++
3476b54a
GM
1587*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1588suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1589expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1590course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1591reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1592to be enabled.
1593
424d8b44 1594+++
8964fec7
SM
1595*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1596containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1597
424d8b44 1598+++
a933dad1
DL
1599*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1600
424d8b44 1601+++
a933dad1
DL
1602*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1603
1604*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1605
8901d1ac
GM
1606Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1607`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1608disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1609`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1610displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1611and background colors.
1612
a933dad1
DL
1613*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1614Pascal) language.
1615
f6499c03 1616+++
a933dad1
DL
1617*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1618the text at point.
1619
1620*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1621
424d8b44 1622+++
8d54eb69
DL
1623*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1624
a933dad1
DL
1625*** whitespace.el ???
1626
ebcfda83
GM
1627*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1628files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1629(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1630interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1631often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1632uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1633codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1634
1635*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1636
1637Here is an example of columns:
1638
1639horse apple bus
1640dog pineapple car EXTRA
1641porcupine strawberry airplane
1642
1643Doing the following settings:
1644
1645 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1646 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1647 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1648 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1649
1650
1651Selecting the lines above and typing:
1652
1653 M-x delimit-columns-region
1654
1655It results:
1656
1657[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1658[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1659[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1660
1661delim-col has the following options:
1662
1663 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1664 before all columns.
1665
1666 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1667 between each column.
1668
1669 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1670 after all columns.
1671
1672 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1673 each column.
1674
1675delim-col has the following commands:
1676
1677 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1678 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1679
424d8b44 1680+++
f507826c 1681*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1682were operated on recently.
1683
1684M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1685
31fc5d15
GM
1686M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1687recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1688
31fc5d15
GM
1689M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1690filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1691file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1692
31fc5d15
GM
1693- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1694- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1695- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1696
31fc5d15
GM
1697The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1698dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1699
8062f458
DL
1700*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1701text.
1702
424d8b44 1703+++
36e24b82 1704*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1705of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1706specific to Message mode.
1707
424d8b44 1708+++
36e24b82
DL
1709*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1710viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1711with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1712
424d8b44 1713+++
aaa659ef
DL
1714*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1715interface to access directory servers using different directory
1716protocols. It has a separate manual.
1717
eee54b0e
DL
1718*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1719for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1720
424d8b44 1721+++
612839b6
GM
1722*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1723
5d94f558 1724*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1725minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1726
399da7e3
DL
1727*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1728with the diary features.
1729
6e417ca5
DL
1730*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1731numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1732
4a27bdfb
GM
1733*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1734Fill mode.
1735
60dd7e0e
DL
1736*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1737Gnus facilities.
1738
a933dad1
DL
1739** Withdrawn packages
1740
1741*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1742functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1743
3261c1d8
DL
1744*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1745
1746*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1747
1748\f
1749* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1750(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1751
4fbdfdcf
MB
1752+++
1753** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1754the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1755message.
1756
6a0b0752
MB
1757** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1758expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1759
47e351a3
GM
1760** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1761with the more general `:mask' property.
1762
ba9eeda1
GM
1763** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1764
a2bd77b8
GM
1765** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1766backslash.
1767
424d8b44
DL
1768+++
1769** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1770is running in batch mode. For example,
1771
1772 (message "%s" (read t))
1773
1774will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1775to standard output.
1776
1777+++
1778** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1779`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1780
ead53494
GM
1781** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1782will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1783frame or window.
1784
f6499c03 1785+++
27848c01
GM
1786** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1787were added
1788
1789- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1790
1791Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1792a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1793
1794- Function: remq ELT LIST
1795
1796Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1797comparison is done with `eq'.
1798
1799** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1800
b548072f
GM
1801** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1802has been changed.
1803
424d8b44 1804+++
07b14857
KH
1805** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1806without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1807convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1808
9662da0b
GM
1809** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1810or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1811
7fce7efb
DL
1812** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1813function was declared obsolete.
1814
5d94f558 1815** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1816retained as an alias).
1817
f98d3086
SM
1818** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1819It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1820is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1821
87efd256
GM
1822** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1823
1824- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1825
1826Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1827MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1828
67c9a1d2
GM
1829** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1830
1831- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1832
1833Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1834
1835This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1836calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1837argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1838value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1839returned.
1840
1841Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1842if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1843it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1844minibuffer even if it is active.
1845
1846Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1847counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1848too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1849and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1850`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1851entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1852
1853ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1854ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1855ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1856ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1857ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1858If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1859Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1860
ead53494
GM
1861** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1862event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1863argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1864
25fa6deb
GM
1865** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1866call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1867message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1868Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1869
5d94f558 1870** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1871meaning no limit.
1872
5d94f558 1873** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1874coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1875DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1876
80c05bd3 1877** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1878of a primitive.
1879
80c05bd3
DL
1880** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1881buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1882This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1883than replacing the local map.
1884
4bc7a543
DL
1885** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1886after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1887
1888** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1889
f6499c03 1890+++
f0298744
DL
1891** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1892promised long ago.
1893
5d94f558 1894** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1895\f
1896* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1897
1898Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1899--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1900When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1901so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1902
85c75536
MB
1903*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1904buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1905the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1906restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1907
0b8a3a6d
DL
1908*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1909`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1910when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1911multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1912
1913*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1914`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1915contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1916
1917*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1918changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1919[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1920regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1921the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1922extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1923bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1924eight-bit-graphic.
1925
1926** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1927
1928A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1929a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1930character set as previously.
1931
1932*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1933They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1934modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1935
1936CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1937characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1938range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1939case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1940
1941FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1942name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1943
1944*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1945registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1946"fontset-default".
1947
1948*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1949argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1950
1951** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1952composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1953buffers and strings.
1954
1955*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1956character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1957code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1958have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1959composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1960composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1961The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1962also been deleted.
1963
1964*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1965specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1966`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1967
1968*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1969MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1970composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1971may differ between buffer and string text.
1972
1973*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1974COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1975
1976*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1977directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1978Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1979`composition' from STRING.
1980
1981*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1982a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1983
1984*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1985obsolete.
1986
1987** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1988Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1989character set is not used.
1990
1991** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1992`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1993X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1994
1995+++
1996** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1997are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 19980xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1999
399da7e3 2000+++
f0124b4a
DL
2001** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2002that offset in the file before writing.
2003
f98d3086
SM
2004** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2005compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2006
612839b6
GM
2007** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2008`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2009from which the command was issued.
2010
2011** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2012`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2013`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2014additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2015operate on.
2016
271b4185
GM
2017** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2018to `window-buffer-height'.
2019
2020- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2021
2022Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2023The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2024lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2025
2026Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2027respectively.
2028
2029If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2030COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2031
2032The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2033obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2034on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2035
2036Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2037buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2038possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2039is currently displayed in some window.
2040
3c30cb6e
DL
2041** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2042argument function's results.
2043
62f20204
GM
2044** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2045signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2046
c0510d27 2047** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2048header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2049
2050** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2051ignores differences in case and text representation.
2052
2053** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2054cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2055as follows:
2056
2057 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2058 nil don't display a cursor
2059 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2060 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2061 others display a box cursor.
2062
9a0dd3dc
GM
2063** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2064an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2065defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2066set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2067
d7b511c4 2068** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2069specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2070the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2071text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2072
2073Example:
2074
2075 (string-to-syntax "()")
2076 => (4 . 41)
2077
1fa28578
GM
2078** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2079other than 10.
2080
2081*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2082INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2083
5d94f558 2084 #b1111
1fa28578 2085 => 15
5d94f558 2086 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2087 => -15
2088
2089*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2090
5d94f558 2091 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2092 => 438
2093
2094*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2095
5d94f558 2096 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2097 => 48815
2098
2099*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2100
5d94f558 2101 #2R-111
1fa28578 2102 => -7
5d94f558 2103 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2104 => 267
2105
3d4ff2dd 2106** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2107the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2108and isn't a string.
2109
3d4ff2dd
GM
2110** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2111a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2112value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2113not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2114
16ce590d
DL
2115+++
2116** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2117
73825616 2118** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2119for a regexp in a string.
2120
2121** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2122`mouse-position-function'.
2123
723e779c
GM
2124** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2125that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2126
d1e103b2
GM
2127** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2128Keywords are now always considered constants.
2129
31047e0d
DL
2130+++
2131** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2132returns it.
2133
7a85e4df
GM
2134** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2135returned by function `recent-keys'.
2136
02b14400
RS
2137+++
2138** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2139can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2140Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2141etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2142mode.
404fa7d6 2143
02b14400 2144+++
8964fec7
SM
2145** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2146and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2147
02b14400
RS
2148+++
2149** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2150has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2151function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2152returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2153been performed."
2154
2155When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2156and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2157hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2158then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2159
02b14400 2160+++
81da8b32
GM
2161** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2162In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2163and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2164
02b14400 2165+++
9e207b90
GM
2166** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2167with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2168specified table.
2169
2170 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2171
2172Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2173TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2174saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2175what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2176
02b14400 2177+++
d7f89643 2178** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2179Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2180
02b14400 2181+++
dde9e75a
GM
2182** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2183removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2184
02b14400 2185+++
9da30515
GM
2186** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2187instead of being optional.
2188
02b14400 2189+++
d20679eb
GM
2190** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2191modify read-only text.
2192
02b14400 2193+++
fbc164de
PE
2194** New functions and variables for locales.
2195
2196The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2197decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2198time functions like strftime. The new variables
2199`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2200locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2201
2202The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2203environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2204the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2205environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2206not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2207`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2208`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2209
02b14400 2210+++
863476d1
SM
2211** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2212To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2213modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2214start sequences.
2215
02b14400 2216+++
ef6d912c
GM
2217** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2218because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2219
02b14400 2220+++
a933dad1
DL
2221** New function `propertize'
2222
2223The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2224strings with text properties.
2225
2226- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2227
2228Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2229by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2230PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2231specified value of that property. Example:
2232
2233 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2234
2235+++
2236** push and pop macros.
2237
02b14400
RS
2238Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2239are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2240as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2241
2242(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2243(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2244 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2245
02b14400
RS
2246** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2247
6c7fd5aa
RS
2248Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2249are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2250
2251(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2252 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2253 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2254 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2255
2256(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2257 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2258 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2259 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2260
a933dad1
DL
2261+++
2262** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2263as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2264
2265[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2266[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2267[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2268[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2269[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2270 space, and DEL.
2271[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2272 and DEL.
2273[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2274 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2275 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2276[:alpha:] matches letters.
2277 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2278 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2279[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2280[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2281[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2282[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2283 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2284 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2285[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2286[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2287[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2288
2289+++
2290** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2291
2292The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2293
2294- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2295
2296The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2297are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2298
2299:test TEST
2300
2301TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2302Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2303it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2304
2305:size SIZE
2306
2307SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2308many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2309
2310:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2311
2312REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2313full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2314size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
23151.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2316old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2317
2318:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2319
2320THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2321hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2322(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2323
2324:weakness WEAK
2325
b548072f
GM
2326WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2327`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2328`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2329collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2330outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2331
2332- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2333
2334Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2335
2336- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2337
2338Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2339
2340- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2341
2342Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2343values are shared.
2344
2345- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2346
2347Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2348
2349- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2350
2351Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2352
2353- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2354
2355Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2356
2357- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2358
2359Returns the size of TABLE.
2360
d96d6bb0 2361- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2362
2363Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2364
2365- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2366
2367Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2368
2369- Function: clrhash TABLE
2370
2371Clear TABLE.
2372
2373- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2374
2375Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2376not found.
2377
79214ddf 2378- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2379
2380Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2381another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2382
2383- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2384
2385Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2386
2387- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2388
2389Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2390arguments KEY and VALUE.
2391
2392- Function: sxhash OBJ
2393
2394Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2395
2396- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2397
2398Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2399a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2400comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2401and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2402of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2403
2404TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2405
2406HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2407code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2408integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2409
2410Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2411be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2412
2413 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2414 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2415
2416 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2417 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2418
79214ddf 2419 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2420 'case-fold-string-hash))
2421
2422 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2423
2424+++
2425** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2426
2427It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2428circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2429a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2430
2431+++
2432** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2433
2434If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2435#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2436
a933dad1
DL
2437+++
2438** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2439t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2440specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2441is too short to reach that column.
2442
2443+++
2444** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2445now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2446after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2447two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2448
2449If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2450perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2451and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2452
2453+++
2454** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2455to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2456
2457+++
2458** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2459calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2460
2461+++
2462** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2463directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2464small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2465small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2466temporary-file-directory instead.
2467
2468+++
2469** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2470the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2471`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2472hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2473
2474+++
2475** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2476elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2477
2478+++
2479** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2480
2481make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2482creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2483ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2484
2485+++
2486** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2487
2488The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2489on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2490is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2491never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2492ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2493overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2494
2495If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2496that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2497to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2498The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2499
2500+++
2501** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2502
2503Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2504If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2505ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2506result string.
2507
2508Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2509string where arguments appear in the result string.
2510
2511Example:
2512
2513 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2514 (s2 "world"))
2515 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2516 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2517 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2518
2519results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2520
2521+++
2522** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2523
2524Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2525The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2526argument in it.
2527
2528 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2529 (arg "world"))
2530 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2531 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2532 (message msg arg))
2533
2534+++
2535** Sound support
2536
2537Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2538(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2539
2540Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2541(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2542to enable sound support.
2543
2544Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2545list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2546when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2547functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2548sound to play, before playing the sound.
2549
2550The following sound properties are supported:
2551
2552- `:file FILE'
2553
2554FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2555searched relative to `data-directory'.
2556
6fb40beb
GM
2557- `:data DATA'
2558
2559DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2560may be present, but not both.
2561
a933dad1
DL
2562- `:volume VOLUME'
2563
2564VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
25650..1. This property is optional.
2566
2567Other properties are ignored.
2568
2569** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2570
2571** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2572a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2573
2574** Changes to garbage collection
2575
2576*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2577of live and free strings.
2578
2579*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2580strings that have been consed so far.
2581
a933dad1 2582\f
04545643
GM
2583* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2584Lisp Manual
2585
82a452c8
GM
2586*** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2587
9a8d84ca
DL
2588+++
2589** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2590
2591** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2592image.
2593
2594- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2595
2596Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2597
2598SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2599measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2600character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2601font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2602FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2603
ebb8f116
GM
2604** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2605has a mask bitmap.
2606
2607- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2608
2609Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2610FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2611or omitted means use the selected frame.
2612
f6499c03 2613+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2614** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2615satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2616
2617+++
2618** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2619optional.
2620
f6499c03
DL
2621+++
2622** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2623below).
04545643
GM
2624
2625\f
a933dad1
DL
2626* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2627
2628Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2629--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2630When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2631so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2632
f6d3257b
GM
2633** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2634to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2635
2636Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2637text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2638is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2639your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2640laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2641just display it black instead.
2642
2643This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2644a line like
2645
2646 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2647
2648in your `.emacs'.
2649
a933dad1
DL
2650** New face implementation.
2651
2652Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2653font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2654
2655+++
2656*** New faces.
2657
2658Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2659
2660 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2661
a933dad1
DL
2662 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2663 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2664
a933dad1 2665 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2666
a933dad1 2667 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2668
a933dad1 2669 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2670
a933dad1 2671 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2672
a933dad1
DL
2673 7. Background color.
2674
2675 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2676
2677 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2678
2679 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2680
2681 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2682
2683 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2684 color.
2685
2686 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2687 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2688
2689Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2690same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2691frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2692faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2693with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2694attributes mentioned above.
2695
2696There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2697definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2698created frames.
79214ddf 2699
a933dad1
DL
2700A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2701have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2702`fully-specified'.
2703
2704+++
2705*** Face merging.
2706
2707The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2708combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2709aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2710properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2711that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2712results in a fully-specified face.
2713
2714+++
2715*** Face realization.
2716
2717After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2718merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2719realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2720available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2721face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2722cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2723
2724Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2725character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2726for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2727charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2728
2729Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2730specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2731being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2732the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2733statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2734
2735In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2736`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
27370x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2738the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2739initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2740Emacs.
2741
2742Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2743`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2744registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2745with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2746
2747++++
2748**** Clearing face caches.
2749
2750The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2751on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2752unused fonts.
2753
2754+++
2755*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2756
a933dad1
DL
2757Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2758given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2759for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2760
2761If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2762pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2763family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2764property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2765an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2766
2767Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2768against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2769match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2770
2771Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2772
2773The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2774attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2775face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2776names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2777that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2778width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2779to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2780
2781Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2782specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2783face doesn't exist.
2784
2785+++
2786**** Scalable fonts
2787
2788Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2789since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2790servers.
2791
2792To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2793`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2794scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2795Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2796scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2797that list. Example:
2798
2799 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2800
2801allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2802
2803+++
2804*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2805
2806- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2807
2808Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2809is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2810string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2811
2812If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2813the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2814FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2815POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2816SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2817These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2818if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2819REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2820the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2821of the face font sort order.
2822
79214ddf 2823- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2824
2825Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2826omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2827(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2828non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2829
2830- Variable: font-list-limit
2831
2832Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2833won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2834matching font. The default is currently 100.
2835
2836+++
2837*** Setting face attributes.
2838
2839For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2840with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2841implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2842`face-attribute'.
2843
2844Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2845symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2846
2847The following attributes are recognized:
2848
2849`:family'
2850
2851VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2852or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2853and `?' are allowed.
2854
2855`:width'
2856
2857VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2858It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2859`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2860`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2861
2862`:height'
2863
787345ff
MB
2864VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2865in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2866scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2867height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2868
2869`:weight'
2870
2871VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2872symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2873`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2874
2875`:slant'
2876
2877VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2878symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2879`reverse-oblique'.
2880
2881`:foreground', `:background'
2882
2883VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2884
2885`:underline'
2886
2887VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2888VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2889a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2890don't underline.
2891
2892`:overline'
2893
2894VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2895VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2896string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2897overline.
2898
2899`:strike-through'
2900
2901VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2902striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2903face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2904is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2905
2906`:box'
2907
2908VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2909around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2910VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2911of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2912and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2913VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2914:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2915the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2916specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2917defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2918the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2919color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2920should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2921like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2922that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2923the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2924box.
2925
2926`:inverse-video'
2927
2928VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2929inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2930
2931`:stipple'
2932
2933If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2934The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2935searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2936HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2937is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2938explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2939
2940For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2941and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2942
2943`:font'
2944
2945Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2946XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2947is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2948versions of Emacs.
2949
2950For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2951be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2952must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2953
2954Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2955`defface'.
2956
787345ff
MB
2957`:inherit'
2958
2959VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
2960of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
2961like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
2962
a933dad1
DL
2963*** Face attributes and X resources
2964
2965The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2966from X resources:
2967
2968 Face attribute X resource class
2969-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2970 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2971 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2972 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2973 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2974 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2975 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2976 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2977 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2978 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2979 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2980 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2981 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2982 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2983 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2984 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2985 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2986 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2987 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2988 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2989
2990+++
2991*** Text property `face'.
2992
2993The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2994specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2995specification can be
2996
29971. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2998
29992. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3000 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3001 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3002 for face attribute names.
3003
30043. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3005 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3006 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3007
3008+++
3009** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3010
acf3ecb7
EZ
3011The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3012on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3013the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3014default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3015`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3016used to clear the mapping table.
3017
acf3ecb7
EZ
3018** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3019
3020The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3021and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3022type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3023color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3024display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3025old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3026`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3027compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3028should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3029modify their color-related behavior.
3030
3031The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3032any frame type.
3033
8a5719f0
EZ
3034** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3035
3036The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3037`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3038`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3039`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3040`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3041`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3042display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3043the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3044platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3045
a933dad1
DL
3046+++
3047** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3048
463cac2d 3049This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3050
3051The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3052end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3053Otherwise, it returns zero.
3054
463cac2d
GM
3055** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3056
3057There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3058buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3059property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3060
9a9dfda8 3061Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3062forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3063to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3064not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3065commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3066boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3067`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3068functions.
463cac2d
GM
3069
3070Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3071a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3072editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3073
9a9dfda8
GM
3074The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3075
59927f88 3076- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3077
3078Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3079
9a9dfda8
GM
3080A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3081If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3082constrained position if that is is different.
3083
3084If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3085positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3086ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3087constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3088as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3089is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3090fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3091the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3092also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3093
3094If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3095NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3096unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3097C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3098only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3099
59927f88
MB
3100If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3101a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3102
3103Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3104
3105- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3106
59927f88 3107Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3108A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3109If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3110
3111- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3112
3113Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3114A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3115If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3116If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3117field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3118
3119- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3120
3121Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3122A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3123If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3124If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3125then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3126
3127- Function: field-string &optional POS
3128
3129Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3130A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3131If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3132
3133- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3134
3135Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3136A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3137If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3138
a933dad1
DL
3139+++
3140** Image support.
3141
3142Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3143strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3144(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3145replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3146
3147If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3148`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3149AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3150window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3151area.
3152
3153IMAGE is an image specification.
3154
3155*** Image specifications
3156
3157Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3158is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3159specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3160symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3161described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3162
3163The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3164
3165`:ascent ASCENT'
3166
576da55d
GM
3167ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3168If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3169to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3170
3171If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3172image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3173
5d94f558 3174If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3175centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3176of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3177overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3178
3179`:margin MARGIN'
3180
79214ddf 3181MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3182margin around the image. Default is 0.
3183
3184`:relief RELIEF'
3185
3186RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3187around an image.
3188
3189`:algorithm ALGO'
3190
47e351a3
GM
3191Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3192
3193ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3194edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3195
3196ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3197apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3198nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3199position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3200around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3201neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3202transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3203x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3204below.
3205
3206 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3207 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3208 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3209
3210The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3211resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3212multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3213of the factors' absolute values.
3214
327652be 3215Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3216
47e351a3
GM
3217 (1 0 0
3218 0 0 0
3219 9 9 -1)
3220
3221Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3222
3223 ( 2 -1 0
3224 -1 0 1
3225 0 1 -2)
3226
ba9eeda1
GM
3227ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3228``disabled''.
3229
47e351a3
GM
3230`:mask MASK'
3231
3232If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3233the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3234image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3235background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3236image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3237the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3238GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3239image.
a933dad1 3240
47e351a3
GM
3241If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3242in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3243`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3244
3245`:file FILE'
3246
3247Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3248search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3249building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3250may be present in the image specification.
3251
518df5c4
GM
3252`:data DATA'
3253
3254Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3255supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3256present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3257support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3258
a933dad1
DL
3259*** Supported image types
3260
b246b1f6 3261**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3262
3263XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3264properties supported are
3265
3266`:foreground FG'
3267
3268FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3269is the frame's foreground.
3270
3271`:background FG'
3272
3273BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3274the frame's background color.
3275
3276XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3277case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3278instead of a `:file' property.
3279
3280`:width WIDTH'
3281
3282WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3283
3284`:height HEIGHT'
3285
3286HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3287
3288`:data DATA'
3289
3290DATA must be either
3291
3292 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3293 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3294
3295 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3296
3297 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3298 bitmap.
3299
c76e04a8
GM
3300 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3301 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3302 in the file.
3303
a933dad1
DL
3304**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3305
3306XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3307`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3308found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3309`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3310
3311Additional image properties supported are:
3312
3313`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3314
3315SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3316name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3317name.
3318
3319XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3320add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3321
a933dad1
DL
3322The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3323to display compressed images.
3324
3325**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3326
3327PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3328mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
3329defined.
3330
3331**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3332
3333Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3334package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3335are:
3336
a933dad1
DL
3337**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3338
3339Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3340package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3341properties defined.
3342
3343**** GIF, image type `gif'
3344
3345Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3346`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3347
3348Additional image properties supported are:
3349
3350`:index INDEX'
3351
3352INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3353multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3354
3355This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3356For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3357at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3358every 0.1 seconds.
3359
3360(defun show-anim (file max)
3361 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3362 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3363
3364(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3365 (when (= idx max)
3366 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3367 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3368 (save-excursion
3369 (set-buffer buffer)
3370 (goto-char (point-min))
3371 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3372 (insert-image img "x"))
3373 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3374
3375**** PNG, image type `png'
3376
3377Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3378package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3379properties defined.
3380
3381**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3382
3383Additional image properties supported are:
3384
3385`:pt-width WIDTH'
3386
3387WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3388integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3389
3390`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3391
3392HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3393must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3394
3395`:bounding-box BOX'
3396
3397BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3398the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3399files. This is an required property.
3400
3401Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3402lisp/gs.el.
3403
3404*** Lisp interface.
3405
79214ddf
FP
3406The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3407which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3408
3409Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3410they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3411The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3412manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3413images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3414
3415*** Simplified image API, image.el
3416
3417The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3418creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3419can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3420define an image based on available image types. The functions
3421`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3422buffer.
3423
3424+++
3425** Display margins.
3426
3427Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3428and images.
3429
3430To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3431`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3432`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3433obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3434`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3435the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3436of the display margins.
3437
3438You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3439containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3440one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3441string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3442in this file).
3443
3444+++
3445** Help display
3446
3447Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3448moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3449`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3450that have a `help-echo' property.
3451
9662da0b 3452If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3453is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3454the window in which the help was found.
3455
3456If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3457`help-echo' text property was found.
3458
3459If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3460POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3461
3462If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3463the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3464mouse.
d5aa31d8 3465
9662da0b
GM
3466If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3467string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3468
3469For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3470determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3471property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3472For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3473used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3474
3475The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3476the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3477causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3478
3479+++
3480** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3481
3482The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3483This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3484
3485The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3486scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3487The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3488scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3489used.
3490
79214ddf
FP
3491 (global-set-key [A-down]
3492 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3493 (interactive)
79214ddf 3494 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3495 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3496 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3497 #'(lambda ()
3498 (interactive)
79214ddf 3499 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3500 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3501
3502+++
3503** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3504
3505Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3506when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3507variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3508is called with one argument, POS.
3509
3510At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3511characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3512as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3513property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3514`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3515
3516+++
3517** Tool bar support.
3518
3519Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3520parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3521controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3522suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3523`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3524automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3525
3526*** Tool bar item definitions
3527
3528Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3529`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3530where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3531
a933dad1
DL
3532CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3533evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3534the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3535property (see below).
79214ddf 3536
a933dad1
DL
3537BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3538binding are currently ignored.
3539
3540The following properties are recognized:
3541
3542`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3543
a933dad1
DL
3544FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3545or disabled.
79214ddf 3546
a933dad1 3547`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3548
a933dad1 3549FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3550
a933dad1
DL
3551`:filter FUNCTION'
3552
3553FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3554FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3555used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3556
a933dad1
DL
3557`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3558
3559TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3560and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3561
a933dad1
DL
3562`:image IMAGES'
3563
3564IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3565image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3566meaning of each of the four elements:
3567
3568 Index Use when item is
3569 ----------------------------------------
3570 0 enabled and selected
3571 1 enabled and deselected
3572 2 disabled and selected
3573 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3574
4ba7246d
GM
3575If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3576algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3577
a933dad1 3578`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3579
a933dad1
DL
3580Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3581is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3582
dab96841 3583The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3584toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3585to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3586menu bar.
dab96841 3587
a933dad1
DL
3588*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3589
3590If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3591resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3592than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3593
79214ddf 3594If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3595raised when the mouse moves over them.
3596
3597You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3598`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3599pixels. Default is 1.
3600
3601You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3602`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3603
3604*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3605
3606You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3607a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3608
3609 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3610 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3611 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3612
3613is the original tool bar item definition, then
3614
3615 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3616
3617makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3618item.
3619
3620** Mode line changes.
3621
3622+++
3623*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3624
3625The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3626that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3627a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3628
36291. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3630a `local-map' text property.
3631
36322. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3633that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3634
36353. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3636is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3637`local-map' property.
3638
3639The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3640properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3641example.
3642
54522c9f
GM
3643*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3644evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3645
a933dad1
DL
3646+++
3647*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3648variable mode-line-format to nil.
3649
3650+++
3651*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3652
3653This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3654`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3655completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3656`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3657line.
3658
3659The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3660`header-line'.
3661
3662The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3663position in the header-line.
3664
3665+++
3666** Text property `display'
3667
623a0aae
GM
3668The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3669replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3670also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3671the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3672below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3673
623a0aae
GM
3674*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3675
3676To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3677text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3678
3679If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3680marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3681the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3682is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3683simpler form STRING as property value.
3684
a933dad1
DL
3685*** Variable width and height spaces
3686
3687To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3688specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3689`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3690area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3691marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3692displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3693simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3694
3695The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3696PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3697properties described below.
3698
3699The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3700characters having the `display' property.
3701
3702- :width WIDTH
3703
3704Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3705character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3706
3707- :relative-width FACTOR
3708
3709Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3710first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3711same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3712width of that character by FACTOR.
3713
3714- :align-to HPOS
3715
3716Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3717value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3718
3719Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3720
3721- :height HEIGHT
3722
3723Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3724normal line height.
3725
3726- :relative-height FACTOR
3727
3728The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3729of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3730
3731- :ascent ASCENT
3732
3733Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3734used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3735baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3736equal to 100.
3737
3738You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3739
3740*** Images
3741
3742A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3743. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3744in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3745their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3746the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3747`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3748area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3749the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3750as display specification.
3751
3752*** Other display properties
3753
3754- :space-width FACTOR
3755
3756Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3757should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3758integer or float.
3759
3760- :height HEIGHT
3761
3762Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3763
3764If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3765means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3766the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3767``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3768a font is available counts as a step.
3769
3770If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3771as tall as the frame's default font.
3772
3773If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3774height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3775
3776Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3777`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3778
3779- :raise FACTOR
3780
3781FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3782font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3783raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3784amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3785`:height' subproperty.
3786
3787*** Conditional display properties
3788
3789All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3790has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3791applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3792During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3793the text having the `display' property.
3794
3795The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3796`(:when t SPEC)'.
3797
3798+++
3799** New menu separator types.
3800
3801Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3802item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3803treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3804to specify other menu separator types.
3805
3806- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3807
3808No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3809separator occurs.
3810
3811- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3812
3813A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3814
3815- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3816
3817A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3818
3819- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3820
3821A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3822
3823- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3824
3825A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3826
3827- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3828
3829A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3830displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3831
3832- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3833
3834A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3835
3836- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3837
3838A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3839
3840- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3841
3842A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3843
3844- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3845
3846Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3847
3848- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3849
3850Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3851
3852- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3853
3854Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3855
3856- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3857
3858Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3859
3860Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3861the corresponding single-line separators.
3862
3863+++
3864** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3865
3866The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3867`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3868Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3869that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3870default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3871default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3872default foreground is black.
3873
3874The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3875(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3876`ScrollBarBackground').
3877
3878Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3879settings for scroll bar colors.
3880
3881+++
3882** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3883display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3884
3885---
3886** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3887starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3888on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3889line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3890the original window start.
3891
3892---
3893** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3894`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3895now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3896
3897+++
3898** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3899
3900A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3901`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3902windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3903other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3904
3905The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3906fixed-width and fixed-height.
3907
3908 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3909
3910A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3911fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3912window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3913change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3914temporarily to nil, for example
3915
3916 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3917 (enlarge-window 10))
3918
79214ddf 3919Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3920or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3921
3922** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3923terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3924to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3925overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3926horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3927support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3928
3787e12e
GM
3929
3930^L
3931* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3932
3933** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3934input.
3935
3936** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3937
3938** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3939
3940** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3941only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3942exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3943(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3944(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3945
3946** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3947been added.
3948
3949^L
3950* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3951
3952** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3953
3954^L
3955* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3956
3957** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3958M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3959\f
3960* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3961
3962** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3963
3964You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3965Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3966`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3967
3968If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3969is the one that is used.
3970
3971** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3972the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3973Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3974separate from the command's regular output.
3975Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3976says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3977In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3978the buffer name.
3979
3980When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3981output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3982it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3983cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3984
3985** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3986the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3987is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3988created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3989
3990** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3991example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3992match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3993quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3994
3995** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3996now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3997if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3998they never ignore case.
3999
4000** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4001under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4002applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4003of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4004just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4005convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4006part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4007
4008If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4009the same format that was used in the file before.
4010
4011You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4012`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4013
4014** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4015renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4016This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4017
4018** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4019The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4020buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4021your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4022is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4023end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4024Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4025
4026The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4027eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4028control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4029format. You can now customize these variables.
4030
4031** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4032filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4033filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4034enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4035
4036** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4037in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4038windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4039
4040** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4041dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4042doesn't have any effect.
4043
4044** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4045not one per buffer.
4046
4047** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4048use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4049 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4050
4051** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4052To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4053`auto-show-mode' command.
4054
4055** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4056avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4057versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4058choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4059occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4060
4061** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4062cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4063
4064** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4065character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4066feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4067
4068** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4069the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4070interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4071and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4072
4073** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4074
4075The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4076that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4077one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4078codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4079set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4080
4081Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4082from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4083
4084IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4085equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4086a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4087`?' on other systems.
4088
4089IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4090feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4091Unix.
4092
4093Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4094current codepage when it starts.
4095
4096** Mail changes
4097
4098*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4099`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4100appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4101non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4102MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4103headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4104latin-1:
4105
4106 MIME-version: 1.0
4107 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4108 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4109
4110*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4111default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4112default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4113sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4114buffer-file-coding-system.
4115
4116You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4117sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4118mail.
4119
4120*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4121if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4122Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4123list of possible coding systems.
4124
4125** CC Mode changes
4126
4127*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4128modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4129longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4130docstring for details.
4131
4132*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4133symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4134found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4135prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4136lineup functions use this feature currently.
4137
4138*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4139"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4140
4141*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4142"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4143
4144*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4145from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4146symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4147c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4148anonymous classes.
4149
4150*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4151syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4152
4153*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4154inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4155support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4156function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4157
4158*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4159(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4160brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4161c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4162(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4163
4164*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4165
4166*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4167
4168*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4169for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4170
4171*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4172
4173*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4174associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4175This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4176circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4177class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4178
4179** Gnus changes.
4180
4181*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4182added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4183Gnus manual for the full story.
4184
4185*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4186before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4187group, which is created automatically.
4188
4189*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4190values.
4191
4192*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4193
4194*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4195outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4196
4197*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4198`C-u C-c C-c'.
4199
4200*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4201
4202*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4203re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4204
4205*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4206
4207*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4208Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4209
4210*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4211`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4212
4213*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4214control over simplification.
4215
4216*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4217
4218*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4219limit.
4220
4221*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4222
4223*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4224
4225*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4226If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4227rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4228
4229*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4230`a' forces normal posting method.
4231
4232*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4233-- `W d'.
4234
4235*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4236to a non-nil value.
4237
4238*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4239where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4240
4241*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4242has been added.
4243
4244*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4245
4246*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4247
4248*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4249`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4250
4251*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4252`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4253
4254*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4255
4256*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4257been added.
4258
4259*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4260`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4261
4262*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4263updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4264
4265*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4266
4267*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4268
4269*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4270
4271** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4272
4273*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4274options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4275nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4276
4277*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4278TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4279of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4280TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4281can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4282
4283*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4284All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4285but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4286the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4287
4288*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4289the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4290buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4291mismatch.
4292
4293** Changes to RefTeX mode
4294
4295*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4296file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4297
4298*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4299lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4300characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4301removed from the label.
4302
4303*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4304a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4305
4306*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4307customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4308
4309*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4310`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4311expressions.
4312
4313*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4314
4315** New/deleted modes and packages
4316
4317*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4318SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4319
4320*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4321editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4322SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4323
4324*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4325changes with a special face.
4326
4327*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4328this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4329Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4330\f
4331* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4332
4333** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4334This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4335conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4336and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4337check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4338
4339The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4340Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4341distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4342
4343** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4344MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4345controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4346directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4347Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4348on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4349string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4350program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4351printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4352
4353** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4354output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4355available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4356input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4357temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4358program.
4359
4360An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4361and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4362programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4363automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4364as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4365ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4366
4367** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4368a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4369MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4370was not documented clearly before.
4371
4372** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4373This includes Tetris and Snake.
4374\f
4375* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4376
4377** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4378return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4379They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4380meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4381
4382** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4383WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4384and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4385
4386** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4387
4388*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4389It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4390
4391*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4392the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4393integers.
4394
4395** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4396files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4397arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4398file names and attributes are returned.
4399
4400** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4401sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4402accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4403It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4404returns the result.
4405
4406** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4407to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4408
4409** New functions for base64 conversion:
4410
4411The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4412into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4413performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4414optionally.
4415
4416Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4417job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4418
4419**
4420The new function process-running-child-p
4421will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4422terminal to its own child process.
4423
4424** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4425when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4426to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4427itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4428
4429** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4430be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4431
4432** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4433:included is an alias for :visible.
4434
4435easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4436easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4437to move or copy menu entries.
4438
4439** Multibyte editing changes
4440
4441*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4442an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4443make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4444work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4445char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4446 (setq char (sref str idx)
4447 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4448The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4449
4450If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4451(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4452 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4453
4454*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4455region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4456deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4457
4458 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4459
4460This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4461across the boundary.
4462
4463*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4464`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4465 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4466 contains 8-bit characters.
4467 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4468 contains invalid characters.
4469
4470*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4471text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4472preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4473text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4474way.
4475
4476*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4477If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4478end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4479prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4480
4481*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4482compose Thai characters in a string.
4483
4484** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4485argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4486for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4487menus should always use the third argument.
4488
4489** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4490read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4491arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4492input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4493
4494** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4495of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4496programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4497inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4498
4499** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4500the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4501returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4502echo area contents.
4503
4504 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4505
4506** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4507NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4508requested feature cannot be loaded.
4509
4510** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4511foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4512means to clear out that attribute.
4513
4514** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4515gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4516
4517** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4518read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4519unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4520end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4521
4522** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4523the gap of the current buffer.
4524
4525** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4526to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4527current buffer.
4528
4529** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4530facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4531These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4532it back in after any modifications have been made.
4533\f
4534* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4535
4536** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4537the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4538/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4539directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4540subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4541
4542Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4543names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4544Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4545which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4546these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4547
4548Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4549starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4550time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4551
4552This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4553Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4554to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4555subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4556`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4557results.
4558
4559** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4560GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4561that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4562fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4563\f
4564* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4565
4566** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4567including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4568it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4569perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4570
4571** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4572specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4573region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4574further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4575command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4576within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4577are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4578region.
4579
4580In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4581selective undo.
4582
4583** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4584unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4585buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4586effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4587Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4588
4589The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4590though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4591-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4592load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4593
4594** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4595no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4596enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4597something that most users not do.
4598
4599** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4600operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4601The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4602applications.
4603
4604C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4605pasting operations.
4606
4607** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4608setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4609like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4610printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4611`ps-printer-name'.
4612
4613** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4614minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4615any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4616except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4617incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4618hits a new word.
4619
4620Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4621Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4622to be confused by TeX commands.
4623
4624You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4625correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4626clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4627of various alternative replacements and actions.
4628
4629Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4630the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4631corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4632alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4633flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4634
4635Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4636flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4637
4638** Changes in input method usage.
4639
4640Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4641the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4642respectively.
4643
4644You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4645
4646If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4647of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4648
4649The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4650that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4651
4652 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4653
4654 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4655
4656 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4657 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4658
4659 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4660 given in the following case:
4661 o When you are using a complex input method.
4662 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4663
4664If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4665input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4666and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4667setting it to t is helpful.
4668
4669The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4670
4671In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4672keys:
4673 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4674 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4675 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4676These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4677environment.
4678
4679** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4680names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4681minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4682get
4683
4684 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4685
4686which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4687
4688Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4689Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4690
4691** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4692at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4693its owner and group.
4694
4695** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4696Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4697
4698** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4699contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4700
4701** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4702which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4703in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4704by the left edge of the rectangle.
4705
4706** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4707increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4708C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4709for writing keyboard macros.
4710
4711** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4712files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4713frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4714the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4715additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4716info.
4717
4718** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4719
4720** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4721query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4722contents only.
4723
4724** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4725confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4726the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4727says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4728
4729** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4730non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4731literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4732
4733** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4734now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4735Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4736inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4737
4738** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4739failure if the command produces no output.
4740
4741** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4742manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4743the mouse.
4744
4745** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4746mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4747function and variable names.
4748
4749** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4750reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4751file-coding-system-alist.
4752
4753** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4754t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4755converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4756the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4757according to the current fontset.
4758
4759** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4760
4761The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4762that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4763nonascii-insert-offset.
4764
4765For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4766enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4767nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4768characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4769
4770** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4771an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4772
4773** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4774letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4775
4776** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4777are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4778command keys.
4779
4780** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4781user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4782
4783Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4784user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4785all variables that have documentation.
4786
4787** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4788shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4789that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4790minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4791it should show; the default is 20.
4792
4793Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4794the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4795of your input.
4796
4797** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4798all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4799recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4800argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4801the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4802Newly added options are included as well.
4803
4804If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4805then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4806for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4807
4808This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4809Customize menu.
4810
4811** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4812the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4813
4814** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4815buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4816invoked.
4817
4818** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4819that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4820The default is 1.
4821
4822** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4823syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4824new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4825(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4826sensibly.
4827
4828** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4829
4830** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4831value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4832two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4833
4834** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4835reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4836for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4837every night.
4838
4839** Desktop changes
4840
4841*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4842the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4843
4844*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4845and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4846
4847** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4848read and post multi-lingual articles.
4849
4850** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4851doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4852be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4853outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4854the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4855made invisible again.
4856
4857** Mail reading and sending changes
4858
4859*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4860the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4861changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4862toggle.
4863
4864*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4865now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4866summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4867the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4868rmail-default-body-file.
4869
4870*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4871longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4872handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4873
4874*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4875it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4876is evaluated to insert the signature.
4877
4878*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4879outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4880handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4881putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4882transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4883especially interested in trying feedmail.
4884
4885feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4886feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4887provided by feedmail are:
4888
4889**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4890stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4891there is also a queue for draft messages
4892
4893**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4894be prompted for confirmation
4895
4896**** does smart filling of address headers
4897
4898**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4899the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4900can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4901
4902**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4903the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4904/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4905function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4906
4907** Dired changes
4908
4909*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4910files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4911
4912*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4913run Dired on the directory name at point.
4914
4915*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4916files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4917for a specified regexp.
4918
4919** VC Changes
4920
4921*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4922conveniently.
4923
4924*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4925faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4926Dired.
4927
4928VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4929directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4930listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4931currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4932
4933You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4934then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4935vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4936control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4937on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4938
4939All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4940is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4941`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4942the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4943`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4944
4945The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4946toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4947VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4948`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4949
4950Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4951ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4952command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4953
4954*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4955file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4956session to resolve them.
4957
4958Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4959resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4960contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4961uses as well).
4962
4963*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4964command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4965you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4966either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4967branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4968If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4969using ediff.
4970
4971** Changes in Font Lock
4972
4973*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4974are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4975use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4976unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4977compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4978
4979** Frame name display changes
4980
4981*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4982frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4983raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4984when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4985
4986*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4987frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4988menu.
4989
4990** Comint (subshell) changes
4991
4992*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4993subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4994with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4995
4996*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4997
4998C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4999that is, the line after the last line you got.
5000You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5001
5002C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5003send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5004the following line.
5005
5006C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5007which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5008previously sent input.
5009
5010C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5011it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5012as the search string.
5013
5014*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5015automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5016
5017** C mode changes
5018
5019*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5020and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5021assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5022definition.
5023
5024*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5025(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5026Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5027style is still the default however.
5028
5029*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5030
5031*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5032are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5033them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5034
5035*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5036and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5037
5038*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5039namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5040
5041*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5042makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5043
5044*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5045c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5046
5047*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5048should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5049package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5050variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5051
5052** Changes to hippie-expand.
5053
5054*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5055non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5056which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5057
5058*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5059non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5060expanding dynamically.
5061
5062*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5063non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5064
5065*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5066non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5067this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5068expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5069
5070*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5071
5072** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5073
5074*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5075bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5076automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5077bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5078against the first word in the title.
5079
5080*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5081capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5082bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5083lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5084lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5085bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5086
5087*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5088generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5089replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5090bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5091
5092** Changes in vcursor.el.
5093
5094*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5095and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5096variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5097entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5098`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5099in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5100
5101*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5102Editing group once the package is loaded.
5103
5104*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5105generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5106vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5107
5108*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5109vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5110
5111** Ispell changes.
5112
5113*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5114buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5115are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5116
5117*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5118A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5119and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5120defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5121include:
5122
5123 o URLs are automatically skipped
5124 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5125
5126*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5127
5128** Changes to RefTeX mode
5129
5130RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5131large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5132re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5133section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5134
5135*** New recursive parser.
5136
5137The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5138entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5139recursive parser scans the individual files.
5140
5141*** Parsing only part of a document.
5142
5143Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5144partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5145the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5146
5147 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5148
5149*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5150
5151This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5152
5153 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5154
5155*** Using multiple selection buffers
5156
5157If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5158for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5159
5160 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5161
5162*** References to external documents.
5163
5164The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5165documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5166documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5167macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5168RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5169the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5170The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5171
5172*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5173
5174The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5175and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5176
5177Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5178the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5179
5180*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5181
5182The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5183buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5184
5185*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5186
5187The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5188contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5189`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5190have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5191enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5192at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5193more.
5194
5195*** Support for the varioref package
5196
5197The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5198
5199*** New hooks
5200
5201Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5202and citations are created. These hooks are
5203`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5204`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5205
5206*** Citations outside LaTeX
5207
5208The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5209a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5210
5211*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5212
5213The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5214fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5215fontified, use
5216
5217 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5218
5219** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5220With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5221the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5222directories that contain the same file name.
5223
5224Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5225Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5226file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5227Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5228have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5229names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5230directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5231directory.
5232
5233** New modes and packages
5234
5235*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5236It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5237it, but some do not.
5238
5239*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5240code.
5241
5242*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5243current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5244around in a buffer.
5245
5246Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5247
5248*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5249uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5250be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5251established system of notation similar to Chess.
5252
5253*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5254documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5255guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5256
5257*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5258available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5259system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5260simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5261functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5262the like.
5263
5264*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5265identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5266
5267*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5268within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5269used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5270the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5271
5272*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5273
5274 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5275 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5276 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5277 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5278 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5279 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5280 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5281 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5282 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5283 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5284 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5285
5286 Platform-specific modes:
5287
5288 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5289 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5290 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5291 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5292 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5293 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5294 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5295 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5296 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5297\f
5298* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5299
5300** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5301use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5302That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5303Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5304
5305Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5306you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5307consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5308
5309** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5310and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5311specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5312searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5313
5314** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5315multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5316character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5317environment.
5318
5319** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5320take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5321string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5322current input method for reading this one event.
5323
5324** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5325now control whether to output certain characters as
5326backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5327non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5328characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5329in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5330\f
5331* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5332
5333** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5334of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5335
5336** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5337in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5338always increases point by 1.
5339
5340The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5341considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5342
5343See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5344
5345** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5346Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5347default value changed. For example,
5348
5349 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5350 :type 'integer
5351 :group 'foo
5352 :version "20.3")
5353
5354 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5355 :version "20.3")
5356
5357If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5358default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5359is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5360`:version' in the top level group.
5361
5362This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5363
5364** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5365starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5366
5367However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5368symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5369support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5370to themselves.
5371
5372If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5373this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5374values whatever.
5375
5376** There is a new debugger command, R.
5377It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5378in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5379
5380** Frame-local variables.
5381
5382You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5383the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5384local bindings for that variable.
5385
5386These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5387frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5388modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5389parameter name.
5390
5391Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5392Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5393active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5394that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5395
5396It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5397clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5398very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5399through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5400
5401** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5402"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5403evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5404makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5405See the documentation in sregex.el.
5406
5407** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5408is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5409parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5410The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5411
5412** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5413If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5414
5415** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5416known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5417define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5418
5419** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5420when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5421it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5422history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5423
5424The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5425return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5426empty input.
5427
5428** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5429for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5430`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5431Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5432`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5433
5434** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5435echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5436a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5437default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5438
5439** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5440specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5441function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5442place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5443non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5444
5445** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5446If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5447up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5448end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5449
5450** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5451which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5452If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5453
5454** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5455holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5456was directed to display this buffer.
5457
5458** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5459with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5460describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5461other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5462set-window-configuration.
5463
5464** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5465window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5466positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5467windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5468
5469** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5470override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5471look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5472
5473If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5474non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5475map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5476
5477minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5478and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5479
5480** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5481except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5482
5483** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5484USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5485floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5486
5487** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5488to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5489in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5490it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5491
5492** Menu changes
5493
5494*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5495keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5496better supported.
5497
5498The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5499a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5500you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5501can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5502then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5503
5504*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5505
5506In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5507 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5508defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5509starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5510
5511The format is:
5512 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5513 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5514where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5515string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5516The supported properties include
5517
5518:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5519 item is enabled.
5520:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5521 item should appear in the menu.
5522:filter FILTER-FN
5523 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5524 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5525 It should return a binding to use instead.
5526:keys DESCRIPTION
5527 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5528 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5529 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5530:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5531 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5532 keyboard binding.
5533:key-sequence nil
5534 This means that the command normally has no
5535 keyboard equivalent.
5536:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5537:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5538 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5539 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5540 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5541
5542Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5543Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5544
5545(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5546
5547** New event types
5548
5549*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5550mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5551corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5552which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5553
5554 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5555
5556where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5557same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5558indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5559negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5560the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5561forward, away from the user.
5562
5563As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5564
5565*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5566files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5567and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5568filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5569loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5570
5571 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5572
5573where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5574same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5575that were dragged and dropped.
5576
5577As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5578
5579** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5580
5581*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5582any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5583to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5584
5585*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5586can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5587that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5588
5589*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5590in Emacs 19 and before.
5591
5592The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5593The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5594
5595*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5596buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5597unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5598representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5599
5600This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5601as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5602viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5603one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5604will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5605
5606This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5607representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5608(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5609consistent with the new representation.
5610
5611*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5612representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5613about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5614however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5615
5616The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5617nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5618using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5619
5620*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5621representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5622representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5623
5624The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5625loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5626is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5627
5628*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5629which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5630
5631*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5632which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5633
5634*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5635portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5636so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5637You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5638
5639*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5640it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5641
5642*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5643convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5644buffer or string being searched.
5645
5646One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5647[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5648searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5649searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5650obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5651you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5652expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5653
5654*** Structure of coding system changed.
5655
5656All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5657by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5658which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5659as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5660vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5661your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5662define-coding-system-alias.
5663
5664The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5665the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5666access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5667pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5668character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5669safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5670'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5671`iso-8859-1'.
5672
5673Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5674The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5675coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5676(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5677
5678Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5679also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5680are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5681the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5682
5683*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5684proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5685This function requires a user interaction.
5686
5687*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5688find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5689select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5690systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5691a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5692select-safe-coding-system.
5693
5694*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5695decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5696last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5697was done.
5698
5699*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5700used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5701coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5702
5703*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5704return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5705characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5706`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5707
5708*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5709coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5710coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5711converted.
5712
5713*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5714coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5715
5716*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5717character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5718character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5719each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5720either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5721range of characters.
5722
5723*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5724Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5725
5726*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5727in the current buffer at position POS.
5728
5729*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5730input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5731function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5732character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5733event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5734binding input-method-function to nil.
5735
5736The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5737method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5738input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5739the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5740not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5741
5742The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5743subsequent events of a key sequence.
5744
5745*** You can customize any language environment by using
5746set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5747
5748The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5749customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5750instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5751environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5752exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5753\f
5754* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5755
5756** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5757options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5758at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5759tree structure.
5760
5761M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5762user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5763
5764With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5765session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5766in your .emacs file.)
5767
5768** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5769You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5770
5771** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5772This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5773
5774** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5775immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5776kills the region.
5777
5778The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5779delete the character before point, as usual.
5780
5781** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5782on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5783by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5784
5785** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5786insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5787the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5788onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5789history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5790past.)
5791
5792** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5793This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5794in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5795TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5796makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5797
5798As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5799and is an alias for it.
5800
5801If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5802use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5803
5804** Scrolling changes
5805
5806*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5807position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5808
5809In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5810on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5811where it started.
5812
5813*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5814move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5815screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5816does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5817
5818*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5819top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5820comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5821recenters the window.
5822
5823** International character set support (MULE)
5824
5825Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5826including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5827Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5828Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5829features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5830MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5831
5832Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5833coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5834character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5835variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5836into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5837
5838Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5839generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5840supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5841language, to make it possible to type them.
5842
5843The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5844character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5845
5846The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5847to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5848
5849You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5850
5851 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5852
5853Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5854characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5855argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5856already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5857characters for their work until they want to change.
5858
5859*** Input methods
5860
5861An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5862specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5863has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5864the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5865support several input methods.
5866
5867The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5868another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5869work.
5870
5871A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5872characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5873composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5874consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5875sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5876letter.
5877
5878The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5879by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5880First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5881marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5882mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5883
5884None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5885they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5886phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5887converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5888
5889Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5890word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5891typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5892the first guess is wrong.
5893
5894*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5895turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5896
5897If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5898byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5899they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5900the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5901
5902However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5903use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5904includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5905translate automatically to and from either one.
5906
5907*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5908
5909Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5910file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5911sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5912what you want.
5913
5914If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5915example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5916system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5917multibyte characters in that buffer.
5918
5919If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5920character conversion as well.
5921
5922*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5923
5924A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5925Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5926requires using many fonts.
5927
5928Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5929collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5930
5931A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5932the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5933have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5934you would use a font.
5935
5936If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5937specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5938display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5939
5940The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5941(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5942characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5943or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5944and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5945
5946*** Defining fontsets.
5947
5948Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5949chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5950with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5951
5952Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5953of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5954`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5955standard fontset are created automatically.
5956
5957If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5958argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5959FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5960with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5961name is `fontset-startup'.
5962
5963Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5964The resource value should have this form:
5965 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5966FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5967 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5968 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5969 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5970The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5971of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5972CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5973FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5974
5975Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5976last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5977You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5978
5979For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5980font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5981following resource,
5982 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5983the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5984 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5985Here is the substitution rule:
5986 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5987 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5988 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5989 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5990 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5991
5992The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5993fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5994that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5995
5996With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5997like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5998name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5999fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6000fontsets.
6001
6002*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6003defaults for a particular choice of language.
6004
6005Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6006method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6007visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6008already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6009language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6010system for new files that you create.
6011
6012It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6013set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6014whole Emacs session.
6015
6016For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6017chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6018with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6019
6020*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6021specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6022specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6023the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6024coding systems that Emacs supports.
6025
6026*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6027lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6028This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6029After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6030is used for *the immediately following command*.
6031
6032So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6033write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6034
6035If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6036then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6037
6038For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6039visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6040
6041*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6042construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6043to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6044specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6045of the file.
6046
6047*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6048the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6049code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6050translated into that character code.
6051
6052This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6053various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6054
6055By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6056
6057*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6058the coding system for keyboard input.
6059
6060Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6061with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6062some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6063
6064By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6065
6066Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6067input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6068translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6069to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6070designed to work with terminals.
6071
6072*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6073specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6074This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6075has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6076translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6077in the corresponding buffer.
6078
6079By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6080
6081*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6082to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6083It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6084
6085*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6086an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6087command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6088want to use.
6089
6090C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6091method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6092
6093*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6094layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6095remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6096which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6097
6098*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6099the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6100related information.
6101
6102*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6103HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6104scripts.
6105
6106*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6107information about the support for a particular language.
6108You specify the language as an argument.
6109
6110*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6111the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6112first dash.
6113
6114A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6115(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6116whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
61171 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6118
6119 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6120 B big5 (Chinese)
6121 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6122 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6123 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6124 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6125 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6126 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6127 K euc-korea (Korean)
6128 R koi8 (Russian)
6129 Q tibetan
6130 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6131 T lao
6132 T tis620 (Thai)
6133 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6134 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6135 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6136 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6137 z hz (Chinese)
6138
6139When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6140two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6141coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6142keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6143
6144*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6145conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6146
6147When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6148into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6149rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6150Rmail files themselves.
6151
6152*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6153conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6154
6155Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6156for sending mail:
6157
6158- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6159- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6160- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6161 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6162- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6163
6164*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6165to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6166Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6167translations.
6168
6169** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6170of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6171insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6172without any conversion.
6173
6174** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6175You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6176RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6177any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6178
6179** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6180functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6181
6182Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6183Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6184
6185Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6186mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6187
6188** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6189complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6190in the buffer before point.
6191
6192With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6193symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6194you are using.
6195
6196With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6197just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6198
6199** File locking works with NFS now.
6200
6201The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6202in the same directory as FILENAME.
6203
6204This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6205works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6206can become a bottleneck.
6207
6208The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6209does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6210create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6211file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6212rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6213so useful that the change is worth while.
6214
6215When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6216are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6217collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6218tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6219
6220** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6221it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6222show-paren-mode.
6223
6224** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6225selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6226delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6227
6228** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6229within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6230complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6231
6232** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6233it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6234set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6235
6236** Changes in View mode.
6237
6238*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6239Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6240
6241*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6242view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6243
6244*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6245previous state.
6246
6247*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6248scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6249
6250*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6251non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6252not just the selected window.
6253
6254*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6255read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6256turns View mode on or off.
6257
6258*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6259how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6260delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6261
6262** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6263now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6264
6265** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6266has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6267presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6268which version to compare with.
6269
6270** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6271blocks if a match is inside the block.
6272
6273The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6274is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6275isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6276shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6277
6278By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6279of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6280blocks, all of them or none.
6281
6282** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6283current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6284confirmation first.
6285
6286** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6287now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6288However, the mode will not be changed if
6289(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6290(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6291 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6292(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6293
6294This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6295
6296However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6297these commands do not change the major mode.
6298
6299** M-x occur changes.
6300
6301*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6302it performs a case-sensitive search.
6303
6304*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6305if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6306using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6307
6308** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6309in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6310window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6311that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6312buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6313
6314** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6315after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6316appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6317come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6318
6319** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6320selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6321buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6322
6323** Outline mode changes.
6324
6325*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6326
6327*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6328
6329** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6330you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6331Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6332was already active.
6333
6334The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6335unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6336get confused by it.
6337
6338If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6339set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6340
6341** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6342
6343*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6344conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6345character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6346including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6347
6348The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6349mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6350copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6351
6352*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6353are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6354values.
6355
6356`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6357case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6358`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6359case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6360
6361** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6362certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6363can be. The default value is 30.
6364
6365** Changes in Mail mode.
6366
6367*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6368Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6369composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6370`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6371`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6372behavior.
6373
6374C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6375compose-mail-other-frame.
6376
6377*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6378the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6379replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6380buffer that shows the original message.
6381
6382*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6383with separator lines around the contents.
6384
6385*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6386in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6387definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6388need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6389
6390*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6391
6392**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6393for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6394controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6395Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6396
6397**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6398to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6399/etc/passwd.
6400
6401**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6402to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6403/etc/passwd.
6404
6405** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6406special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6407directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6408reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6409
6410Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6411when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6412be taken to be magic.
6413
6414** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6415files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6416available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6417
6418M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6419(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6420
6421** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6422suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6423
6424In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6425
6426new key dired.el binding old key
6427------- ---------------- -------
6428 * c dired-change-marks c
6429 * m dired-mark m
6430 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6431 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6432 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6433 * u dired-unmark u
6434 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6435 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6436 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6437 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6438 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6439 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6440
6441** Rmail changes.
6442
6443*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6444saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6445chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6446each time you run it.
6447
6448*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6449whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6450
6451*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6452messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6453means to move in the opposite direction.
6454
6455*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6456you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6457
6458*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6459just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6460It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6461can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6462for output.
6463
6464** Gnus changes.
6465
6466*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6467
6468*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6469Gnus.
6470
6471*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6472`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6473
6474*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6475article mode line.
6476
6477*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6478
6479*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6480
6481(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6482
6483*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6484are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6485`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6486
6487*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6488
6489*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6490
6491*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6492See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6493
6494*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6495Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6496used to pick articles.
6497
6498*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6499another have been added.
6500
6501 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6502
6503*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6504generating lines in buffers.
6505
6506*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6507`M-C-_'.
6508
6509*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6510
6511*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6512
6513 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6514
6515*** Scores can be decayed.
6516
6517 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6518
6519*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6520Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6521
6522*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6523the native server.
6524
6525 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6526
6527*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6528(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6529
6530*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6531
6532*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6533even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6534
6535*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6536(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6537
6538 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6539 a group.
6540
6541*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6542sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6543
6544 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6545
6546*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6547
6548 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6549
6550*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6551
6552 Use the `Y c' command.
6553
6554*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6555
6556*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6557
6558 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6559
6560*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6561from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6562
6563 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6564
6565*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6566
6567*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6568the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6569
6570 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6571
6572Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6573and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6574from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6575hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6576this issue.)
6577
6578Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6579automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6580particular news group. This can be done by:
6581
6582 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6583
6584Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6585of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6586"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6587system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6588for reading and posting).
6589
6590CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6591 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6592Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6593newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6594there.
6595
6596Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6597default. Here are some of these default settings:
6598
6599 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6600 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6601 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6602 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6603 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6604
6605When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6606the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6607
6608** CC mode changes.
6609
6610*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6611code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6612values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6613this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6614Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6615loaded.
6616
6617If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6618Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6619style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6620share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6621c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6622must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6623
6624*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6625of the current buffer.
6626
6627*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6628it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6629of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6630
6631*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6632style that the Python developers like.
6633
6634*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6635This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6636just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6637
6638** VC Changes [new]
6639
6640** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6641name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6642directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6643
6644This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6645master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6646developers.
6647
6648You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6649RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6650
6651*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6652other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6653writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6654calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6655
6656*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6657version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6658
6659** Calendar changes.
6660
6661A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6662of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6663for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6664
6665** ps-print changes
6666
6667There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6668
6669*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6670
6671The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6672formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6673`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6674`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6675It defaults to `letter'.
6676If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6677
6678The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6679of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6680non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6681
6682The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6683It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6684It defaults to 1.
6685
6686*** Horizontal layout
6687
6688The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6689`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6690All are measured in points.
6691
6692*** Vertical layout
6693
6694The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6695`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6696All are measured in points.
6697
6698*** Headers
6699
6700If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6701`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6702margin above the text.
6703
6704If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6705framing box is printed around the header.
6706
6707The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6708`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6709
6710The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6711`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6712`ps-header-font-size'.
6713
6714*** Font managing
6715
6716The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6717used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6718`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6719elements to this alist.
6720
6721The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6722for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6723
6724** hideshow changes.
6725
6726*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6727C++, ; for lisp).
6728
6729*** Support for java-mode added.
6730
6731*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6732in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6733
6734*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6735the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6736way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6737
6738*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6739robust and a lot faster.
6740
6741*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6742
6743*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6744to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6745documentation for more details.
6746
6747** Changes in Enriched mode.
6748
6749*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6750filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6751of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6752use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6753the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6754
6755*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6756distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6757as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6758as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6759
6760** Font Lock mode
6761
6762*** Custom support
6763
6764The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6765font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6766faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6767group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6768your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6769consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6770
6771You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6772
6773*** Maximum decoration
6774
6775Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6776default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6777of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6778supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6779to get the old behavior.
6780
6781*** New support
6782
6783Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6784
6785Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6786support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6787
6788*** Configurable support
6789
6790Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6791additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6792c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6793java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6794list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6795of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6796convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6797
6798Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6799way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6800it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6801
6802*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6803
6804You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6805highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6806for any mode.
6807
6808For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6809
6810 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6811
6812in your ~/.emacs.
6813
6814*** New faces
6815
6816Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6817font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6818distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6819to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6820
6821*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6822
6823The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6824cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6825same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6826
6827*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6828
6829The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6830according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6831the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6832non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6833refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6834the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6835Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6836
6837This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6838For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6839this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6840refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6841containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6842the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6843
6844As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6845
6846Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6847Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6848Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6849new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6850
6851If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6852settings.
6853
6854** Ada mode changes.
6855
6856*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6857If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6858procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6859you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6860stubs.
6861
6862*** There are two new commands:
6863 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6864 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6865
6866The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6867`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6868`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6869
6870*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6871is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6872Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6873
6874*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6875formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6876places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6877space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6878
6879** Scheme mode changes.
6880
6881*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6882mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6883for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6884with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6885have any effect.
6886
6887If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6888still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6889scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6890variables as buffer-local variables.
6891
6892*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6893Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6894
6895** Changes to the emacsclient program
6896
6897*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6898USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6899associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6900can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6901
6902*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6903it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6904buffer in Emacs.
6905
6906*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6907use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6908ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6909option takes precedence.
6910
6911** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6912constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6913(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6914
6915** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6916which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6917the current defun.
6918
6919** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6920following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6921
6922** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6923and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6924necessary).
6925
6926** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6927if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6928these register values no longer become completely useless.
6929If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6930asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6931it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6932
6933** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6934example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6935be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6936you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6937
6938You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6939variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6940file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6941revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6942only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6943
6944** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6945since it applies only to the current frame.
6946
6947** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6948file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6949and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6950
6951This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6952multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6953variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6954tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6955instead of just the file you are editing.
6956
6957** RefTeX mode
6958
6959RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6960and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6961different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6962multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6963turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6964
6965C-c ( reftex-label
6966 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6967 knows which kind of label is needed.
6968
6969C-c ) reftex-reference
6970 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6971 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6972
6973C-c [ reftex-citation
6974 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6975 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6976
6977C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6978 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6979
6980C-c = reftex-toc
6981 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6982 can quickly jump to every section.
6983
6984Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6985commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6986Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6987reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6988C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6989
6990** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6991
6992*** Info documentation is now available.
6993
6994*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6995both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6996
6997*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6998bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6999
7000*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7001(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7002
7003*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7004entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7005appropriate functions.
7006
7007*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7008entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7009
7010*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7011been cleaned.
7012
7013*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7014bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7015
7016*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7017shall be delimited.
7018
7019*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7020bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7021bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7022
7023*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7024field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7025prefixed with `ALT'.
7026
7027*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7028bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7029formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7030documentation).
7031
7032*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7033documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7034for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7035
7036*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7037comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7038
7039*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7040alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7041signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7042
7043*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7044
7045*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7046
7047*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7048from alien sources.
7049
7050*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7051to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7052crossref entries.
7053
7054*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7055region.
7056
7057*** Added support for imenu.
7058
7059*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7060of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7061`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7062`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7063
7064*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7065from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7066
7067** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7068
7069** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7070
7071** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7072functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7073Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7074as an argument.
7075
7076When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7077and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7078
7079** browse-url changes
7080
7081*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7082Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7083(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7084non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7085customization variables.
7086
7087*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7088
7089*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7090lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7091(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7092
7093** Changes in Ediff
7094
7095*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7096pops up the Info file for this command.
7097
7098*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7099the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7100merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7101directories).
7102
7103*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7104and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7105files in the same directory.
7106
7107*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7108The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7109related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7110
7111** Changes in Viper
7112
7113*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7114*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7115 instead of vip-.
7116*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7117*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7118Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7119*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7120*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7121*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7122color when Viper is in insert state.
7123*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7124Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7125viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7126
7127** Etags changes.
7128
7129*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7130default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7131Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7132variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7133not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7134
7135*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7136
7137*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7138constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7139
7140*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7141recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7142In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7143
7144*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7145C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7146recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7147methods and protocols.
7148
7149*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7150.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7151column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7152paragraph name.
7153
7154*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7155an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7156at least M times and as many as N times.
7157
7158** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7159in files has changed slightly.
7160
7161With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7162time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7163This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7164with old time-stamp-format values.
7165
7166In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7167(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7168This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7169reasons.
7170
7171In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7172natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7173fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7174(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7175time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7176specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7177
7178Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7179case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7180truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7181
7182The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7183being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7184future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7185recommended now will continue to work then.
7186
7187See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7188details.
7189
7190** There are some additional major modes:
7191
7192dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7193m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7194meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7195
7196** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7197copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7198into Emacs.
7199
7200** New Lisp packages include:
7201
7202*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7203
7204*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7205be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7206
7207*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7208
7209*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7210in shell buffers.
7211
7212*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7213See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7214and `elint-defun'.
7215
7216*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7217meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7218ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7219strings or comments.
7220
7221These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7222abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7223you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7224insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7225at these points.
7226
7227*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7228can visit them by short forms of their names.
7229
7230*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7231Emacs Lisp function at point.
7232
7233*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7234
7235*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7236switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7237
7238*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7239
7240*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7241
7242*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7243
7244*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7245from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7246
7247*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7248You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7249inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7250original place after inserting the copy.
7251
7252*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7253on the buffer.
7254
7255You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7256velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7257(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7258
7259Enable mouse-drag with:
7260 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7261-or-
7262 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7263
7264*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7265mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7266
7267*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7268It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7269
7270*** ogonek
7271
7272The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7273Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7274platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7275TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7276ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7277prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7278instance) and vice versa.
7279
7280To use this package load it using
7281 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7282Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7283 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7284 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7285The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7286ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7287
7288*** Interface to ph.
7289
7290Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7291
7292The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7293services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7294these servers.
7295
7296*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7297
7298*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7299You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7300while the real cursor does not move.
7301
7302*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7303for visiting your favorite web sites.
7304
7305*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7306so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7307
7308** movemail change
7309
7310Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7311mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7312supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7313user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7314
7315This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7316\f
7317* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7318
7319** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7320
7321Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7322end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7323Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7324file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7325file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7326
7327To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7328C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7329coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7330specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7331LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7332save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7333\f
7334* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7335
7336** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7337Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7338vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7339Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7340
7341** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7342to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7343
7344In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7345don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7346"win".
7347
7348** Basic Lisp changes
7349
7350*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7351evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7352
7353*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7354be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7355or by the user.
7356
7357The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7358
7359*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7360
7361(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7362(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7363
7364*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7365usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7366its argument.
7367
7368*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7369
7370*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7371
7372*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7373
7374*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7375error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7376include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7377`format' function.
7378
7379*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7380or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7381whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7382
7383*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7384either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7385adding one of these suffixes.
7386
7387*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7388which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7389If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7390
7391We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7392because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7393
7394*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7395
7396*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7397You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7398
7399*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7400conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7401
7402 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7403
7404BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7405BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7406
7407*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7408choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7409restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7410works using `save-current-buffer'.
7411
7412*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7413write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7414of the last form.
7415
7416*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7417which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7418last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7419as the last form.
7420
7421*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7422characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7423matches.
7424
7425For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7426
7427*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7428with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7429Then it returns that string.
7430
7431For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7432
7433(with-output-to-string
7434 (princ "The buffer is ")
7435 (princ (buffer-name)))
7436
7437returns "The buffer is foo".
7438
7439** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7440is non-nil.
7441
7442These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7443buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7444characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7445
7446*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7447a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7448
7449Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7450character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7451Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7452position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7453characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7454 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7455
7456ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7457Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7458non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7459characters".
7460
7461The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7462through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7463"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7464range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7465leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7466
7467*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7468(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7469multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7470character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7471
7472This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7473always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7474
7475However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7476
7477*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7478because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7479have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7480the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7481guaranteed.
7482
7483*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7484between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7485character).
7486
7487When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7488
7489 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7490 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7491 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7492 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7493 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7494
7495*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7496
7497*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7498`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7499more than the number of characters.
7500
7501You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7502it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7503\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7504is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7505follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7506newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7507
7508*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7509and returns a string containing those characters.
7510
7511*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7512(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7513counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7514character, sref signals an error.
7515
7516*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7517in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7518string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7519
7520*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7521in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7522region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7523
7524*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7525the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7526to a vector of the characters in it.
7527
7528*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7529of a string. You call it as follows:
7530
7531 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7532
7533This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7534STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7535This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7536Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7537it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7538
7539*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7540if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7541
7542*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7543if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7544
7545*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7546to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7547not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7548which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7549
7550(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7551
7552This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7553
7554The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7555If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7556are not included in the resulting value.
7557
7558The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7559at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7560WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7561is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7562
7563If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7564place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7565character extends across that column), then the padding character
7566PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7567string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7568column START-COLUMN.
7569
7570*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7571the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7572necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7573difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7574changed text, before the change.
7575
7576*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7577sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7578one character set for each script, not for each language.
7579
7580**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7581
7582**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7583
7584**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7585set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7586
7587**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7588name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7589which identify the character within that character set.
7590
7591**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7592byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7593opposite of split-char.
7594
7595**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7596of all the characters between BEG and END.
7597
7598**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7599of all the characters in a string.
7600
7601*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7602and specifying coding systems.
7603
7604**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7605system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7606of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7607(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7608and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7609as what to do about code conversion.)
7610
7611**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7612name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7613
7614**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7615for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7616except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7617
7618Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7619which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7620to match against a file name.
7621
7622VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7623a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7624decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7625to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7626systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7627specifies the coding system for encoding.
7628
7629If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7630or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7631
7632**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7633the coding system to use for network sockets.
7634
7635Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7636which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7637either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7638service names.
7639
7640VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7641a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7642decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7643to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7644systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7645specifies the coding system for encoding.
7646
7647If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7648or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7649
7650**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7651for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7652except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7653start the subprocess.
7654
7655**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7656systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7657when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7658(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7659to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7660
7661**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7662coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7663subprocess.
7664
7665It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7666but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7667start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7668connection permanently or until overridden.
7669
7670The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7671file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7672network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7673coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7674It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7675system for one operation at a time.
7676
7677**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7678files, subprocesses or network connections.
7679
7680**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7681coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7682The value is a cons cell,
7683 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7684where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7685the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7686input to the subprocess.
7687
7688**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7689change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7690
7691** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7692customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7693you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7694
7695You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7696variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7697information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7698legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7699customization.
7700
7701Thus, instead of writing
7702
7703 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7704 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7705
7706you would now write this:
7707
7708 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7709 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7710 :type 'boolean
7711 :group foo)
7712
7713The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7714two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7715describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7716for a description of them.
7717
7718The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7719should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7720
7721 (defgroup ispell nil
7722 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7723 :group 'processes)
7724
7725The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7726group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7727but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7728to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7729second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7730
7731Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7732package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7733have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7734package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7735first-level subgroups.
7736
7737** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7738
7739This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7740separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7741
7742** easy-mmode
7743
7744The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7745developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7746only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7747predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7748`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7749`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7750
7751** Text property changes
7752
7753*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7754text property.
7755
7756*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7757previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7758place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7759functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7760starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7761
7762If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7763LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7764of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7765position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7766
7767*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7768value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7769is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7770
7771** Changes in invisibility features
7772
7773*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7774hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7775is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7776should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7777would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7778make the overlay visible.
7779
7780During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7781invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7782needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7783which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7784the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7785t when it should hide it.
7786
7787*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7788
7789Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7790invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7791and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7792Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7793manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7794Here is an example of how to do this:
7795
7796 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7797 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7798 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7799 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7800
7801 ...
7802 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7803
7804 ...
7805 ;; When done with the overlays:
7806 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7807 ;; Or respectively:
7808 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7809
7810** Changes in syntax parsing.
7811
7812*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7813`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7814obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7815`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7816
7817If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7818is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7819used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7820
7821When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7822character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7823
7824 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7825 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7826
7827 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7828 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7829 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7830
7831 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7832 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7833 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7834 determine the syntax type of the character.
7835
7836 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7837 of the current buffer.
7838
7839*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7840value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7841for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7842
7843*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7844and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7845only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7846character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7847another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7848
7849These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7850text property.
7851
7852*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7853arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7854of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7855
7856*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7857(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7858element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7859nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7860string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7861
7862*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7863syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7864`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7865
7866** Changes in face features
7867
7868*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7869if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7870
7871*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7872of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7873
7874*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7875set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7876
7877*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7878set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7879
7880*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7881by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7882and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7883the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7884overlay property).
7885
7886This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7887arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7888
7889** Changes in file-handling functions
7890
7891*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7892directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7893they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7894is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7895
7896This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7897begins with ~.
7898
7899*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7900it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7901
7902*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7903the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7904
7905*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7906as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7907
7908*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7909character code conversion as well as other things.
7910
7911Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7912(formerly it did not).
7913
7914*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7915environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7916
7917*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7918instead of constant strings.
7919
7920*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7921to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7922any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7923
7924substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7925in the same way as before.
7926
7927*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7928The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7929which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7930
7931*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7932error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7933else, and returns nil.
7934
7935*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7936directory cannot be listed.
7937
7938** Changes in minibuffer input
7939
7940*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7941read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7942additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7943argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7944ways:
7945
7946 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7947 It is available through the history command M-n.
7948
7949*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7950read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7951argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7952minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7953enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7954
7955In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7956argument in this way.
7957
7958*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7959from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7960minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7961
7962** Echo area features
7963
7964*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7965echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7966minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7967after the echo area is cleared.
7968
7969*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7970in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7971
7972** Keyboard input features
7973
7974*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7975set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7976
7977*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7978received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7979by keyboard macros.
7980
7981** Frame-related changes
7982
7983*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7984creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7985hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7986
7987*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7988the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7989has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7990
7991*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7992selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7993value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7994in the selected frame.
7995
7996*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7997is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7998which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7999
8000** X Windows features
8001
8002*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8003x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8004x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8005
8006*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8007The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8008
8009*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8010MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8011A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8012
8013If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8014it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8015
8016** Subprocess features
8017
8018*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8019functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8020automatically.
8021
8022*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8023and returns the output from the command as a string.
8024
8025*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8026and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8027
8028** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8029does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8030
8031** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8032at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8033goes after the other menu items.
8034
8035** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8036of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8037around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8038are in use.
8039
8040The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8041series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8042
8043Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8044after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8045form.
8046
8047** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8048is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8049but its hook is still run.
8050
8051** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8052for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8053
8054If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8055regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8056useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8057
8058This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8059are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8060filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8061warned.
8062
8063** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8064way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8065
8066** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8067integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8068functions like display-time.
8069
8070** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8071name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8072
8073** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8074can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8075is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8076
8077** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8078if there is an error in compilation.
8079
8080** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8081switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8082argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8083they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8084
8085** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8086Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8087the *scratch* buffer.
8088
8089** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8090The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8091where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8092e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8093
8094** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8095and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8096It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8097
8098** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8099using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8100variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8101and compose-mail-other-frame.
8102
8103** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8104can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8105full name of the specified user will be returned.
8106
8107** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8108of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8109where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8110in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8111option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8112files at all.
8113
8114** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8115and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8116width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8117the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8118
8119For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8120minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8121with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8122is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8123
8124** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8125
8126** imenu.el changes.
8127
8128You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8129item from menu created by imenu.
8130
8131An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8132#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8133select one of those items.
8134\f
8135* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8136\f
8137* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8138
8139** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8140mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8141
8142** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8143use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8144Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8145\f
8146* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8147
8148** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8149To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8150
8151** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8152conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8153matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8154expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8155word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8156all caps.
8157
8158** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8159at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8160
8161When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8162does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8163as in previous Emacs versions.
8164
8165** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8166non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8167time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8168frames.
8169
8170** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8171if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8172This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8173Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8174accident.
8175
8176** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8177keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8178It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8179line and then executing the macro.
8180
8181This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8182
8183** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8184(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8185characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8186characters.
8187
8188** Font Lock mode
8189
8190*** Font Lock support modes
8191
8192Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8193below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8194hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8195to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8196Font Lock mode is enabled.
8197
8198For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8199
8200 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8201
8202in your ~/.emacs.
8203
8204*** lazy-lock
8205
8206The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8207only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8208becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8209Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8210occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8211buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8212Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8213
8214To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8215
8216 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8217
8218To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8219
8220** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8221
8222*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8223paren and key.
8224
8225*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8226supported.
8227
8228** Gnus changes.
8229
8230Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8231commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8232significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8233previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8234
8235Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8236between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8237
8238*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8239variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8240obsolete.
8241
8242*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8243missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8244
8245 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8246
8247*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8248
8249 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8250
8251*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8252referred.
8253
8254*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8255
8256 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8257
8258*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8259
8260 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8261
8262*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8263buffers.
8264
8265 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8266
8267*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8268
8269 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8270
8271*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8272
8273 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8274
8275*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8276
8277 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8278
8279*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8280is possible.
8281
8282 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8283
8284*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8285groups of groups.
8286
8287*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8288
8289*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8290batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8291
8292*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8293
8294*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8295
8296*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8297
8298 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8299
8300*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8301expiration times.
8302
8303*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8304
8305*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8306process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8307
8308*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8309articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8310bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8311
8312*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8313articles with the `*' command.
8314
8315*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8316
8317*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8318
8319 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8320
8321*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8322
8323*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8324`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8325
8326*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8327buffer.
8328
8329*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8330
8331*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8332
8333*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8334
8335 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8336
8337*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8338
8339 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8340
8341*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8342
8343*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8344
8345*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8346
8347 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8348 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8349
8350*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8351refetching.
8352
8353 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8354
8355*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8356buffer to allow easier treatment.
8357
8358*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8359
8360*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8361
8362 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8363
8364*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8365articles.
8366
8367 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8368
8369*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8370
8371*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8372cited text to hide is now customizable.
8373
8374 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8375
8376*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8377
8378 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8379
8380*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8381
8382*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8383
8384The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8385in greater detail.
8386\f
8387* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8388
8389** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8390second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8391asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8392exists.
8393
8394** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8395as well as lists.
8396
8397** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8398of a given keymap.
8399
8400** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8401given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8402keymap or nil.
8403
8404** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8405an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8406name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8407menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8408equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8409alias.
8410\f
8411* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8412
8413** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8414
8415Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8416This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8417was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8418far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8419pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8420
8421For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8422you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8423`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8424
8425** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8426
8427The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8428do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8429It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8430much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8431chapter of the manual for details.
8432
8433However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8434customization variables take effect.
8435
8436** Marking with the mouse.
8437
8438When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8439highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8440using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8441
8442** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8443
8444*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8445
8446*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8447to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8448
8449*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8450in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8451you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8452application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8453applications, these problems are significant.
8454
8455If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8456likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8457However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8458will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8459other DOS application as a subprocess.
8460
8461Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8462You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8463
8464If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8465subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8466have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8467Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8468separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8469Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8470
8471** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8472
8473This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8474which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8475minibuffer contains.
8476
8477** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8478
8479The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8480It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8481It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8482affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8483
8484The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8485it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8486and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8487when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8488
8489** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8490enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8491
8492** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8493F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8494Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8495
8496If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8497menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8498something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8499the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8500
8501 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8502
8503** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8504to replace the characters it "deletes".
8505
8506** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8507
8508** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8509a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8510select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8511It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8512immediately after the selected one.
8513
8514This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8515made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8516
8517** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8518
8519Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8520directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8521If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8522Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8523recover-session.
8524
8525You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8526auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8527will not work.
8528
8529Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8530normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8531this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8532bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8533now that the bug is fixed.
8534
8535** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8536
8537There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8538when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8539Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8540which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8541
8542If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8543telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8544VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8545the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8546
8547** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8548Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8549is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8550
8551There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8552Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8553enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8554The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8555remain normal.
8556
8557** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8558header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8559
8560Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8561known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8562offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8563Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8564
8565Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8566of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8567a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8568name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8569documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8570`mail-directory-stream'.)
8571
8572** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8573skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8574characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8575with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8576
8577Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8578- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8579wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8580
8581The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8582less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8583headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8584Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8585Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8586fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8587to a limitation in font-lock).
8588
8589External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8590
8591** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8592buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8593buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8594this example:
8595
8596 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8597 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8598
8599** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8600
8601*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8602
8603*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8604
8605*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8606
8607*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8608entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8609will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8610isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8611(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8612The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8613
8614*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8615does the same job.
8616
8617*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8618"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8619
8620*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8621text.
8622
8623** Font Lock mode
8624
8625*** Global Font Lock mode
8626
8627Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8628new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8629font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8630turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8631on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8632
8633For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8634
8635 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8636
8637in your ~/.emacs.
8638
8639*** Local Refontification
8640
8641In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8642However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8643those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8644command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8645
8646In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8647(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8648current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8649above and below point.
8650
8651With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8652
8653** Follow mode
8654
8655Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8656buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8657side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8658they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8659split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8660follow-mode.
8661
8662M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8663
8664To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8665command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8666
8667** hide-show changes.
8668
8669The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8670to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8671normal hooks.
8672
8673** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8674The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8675
8676** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8677recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8678those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8679
8680** MSDOS Changes
8681
8682*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8683Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8684
8685*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8686and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8687
8688*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8689
8690*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8691pressing both mouse buttons.
8692
8693*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8694restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8695are:
8696
8697**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8698now works.
8699
8700**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8701
8702**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8703implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8704
8705**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8706
8707**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8708
8709**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8710
8711**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8712
8713**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8714\f
8715* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8716
8717** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8718tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8719remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8720this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8721behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8722
8723** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8724
8725The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8726not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8727need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8728be different.
8729
8730It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8731than `system-type'.
8732
8733See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8734
8735** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8736now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8737
8738** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8739that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8740
8741** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8742no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8743reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8744
8745The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8746to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8747like this:
8748
8749 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8750
8751SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8752It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8753becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8754
8755REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8756seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8757means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8758
8759*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8760up if too much time passes.
8761
8762 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8763
8764This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8765If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8766of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8767form in BODY.
8768
8769*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8770a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8771call looks like this:
8772
8773 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8774
8775SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8776runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8777timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8778ARGS.
8779
8780Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8781command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8782command.
8783
8784REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8785time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8786does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8787each time Emacs becomes idle.
8788
8789If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8790idle for SECS seconds.
8791
8792*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8793all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8794programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8795instead.
8796
8797*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8798there is no answer within a certain time.
8799
8800 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8801
8802asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8803within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8804Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8805
8806** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8807arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8808meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8809arguments in between are ignored.
8810
8811This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8812the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8813
8814** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8815/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8816/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8817site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8818version.
8819
8820It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8821version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8822for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8823has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8824and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8825problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8826
8827** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8828.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8829systems with limited file name syntax.
8830
8831Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8832convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8833for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8834completions.el:
8835
8836(defvar save-completions-file-name
8837 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8838 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8839
8840This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8841depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8842convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8843Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8844MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8845
8846** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8847rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8848minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8849
8850** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8851marker from its buffer position.
8852
8853** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8854Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8855The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8856
8857** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8858that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8859condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8860of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8861matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8862regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8863
8864This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8865errors that happen often during editing.
8866
8867** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8868into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8869puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8870
8871** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8872now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8873
8874** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8875a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8876name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8877to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8878and not get-buffer-window.
8879
8880** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8881calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8882being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8883
8884If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8885buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8886property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8887non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8888are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8889property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8890over and over for the same text.
8891
8892** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8893
8894*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8895in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8896
8897;; @(#) HEADER: text
8898;; $HEADER: text $
8899
8900in addition to the normal
8901
8902;; HEADER: text
8903
8904*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8905checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8906lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8907
8908
a933dad1 8909\f
3787e12e 8910* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8911
8912----------------------------------------------------------------------
8913Copyright information:
8914
424d8b44 8915Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8916
8917 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8918 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8919 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8920 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8921
8922 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8923 of this document, or of portions of it,
8924 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8925 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8926\f
8927Local variables:
8928mode: outline
8929paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8930end: